2018 F150

User Manual: Pdf 2018-f150

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 639 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

May 2018
Fourth Printing
Owner’s Manual
F-150
Litho in U.S.A.
JL3J 19A321 AC
2018 F-150 Owner’s Manual
ford.caowner.ford.com
2018 F-150 Owner’s Manual
3456711_18a_F-150_OM_051017.indd 1 4/25/18 11:30 AM
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201709 20180419162906
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your
hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................7
Data Recording .................................................9
Perchlorate ........................................................11
Ford Credit .........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................13
Export Unique Options ................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................15
At a Glance
Instrument Panel Overview .......................16
Child Safety
General Information ......................................18
Installing Child Restraints ...........................19
Booster Seats ..................................................31
Child Restraint Positioning ........................33
Child Safety Locks ........................................35
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation .................................36
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................37
Seatbelt Height Adjustment ......................41
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime .............................................................41
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................42
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ...............................................44
Seatbelt Extension .......................................44
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™........................46
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation ..................................47
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................48
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........49
Side Airbags .....................................................51
Safety Canopy™............................................52
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......54
Airbag Disposal ..............................................54
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................55
Remote Control .............................................55
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
...........................................................................61
MyKey™
Principle of Operation .................................62
Creating a MyKey ..........................................63
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................64
Checking MyKey System Status .............64
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................65
MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................65
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................67
Keyless Entry ...................................................70
Tailgate
Tailgate Lock ....................................................72
Manual Tailgate ..............................................72
Electronic Tailgate .........................................72
Removing the Tailgate .................................73
Tailgate Step ...................................................74
Bed Extender ...................................................75
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System .........................77
1
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Anti-Theft Alarm ..........................................80
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards ....................81
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................83
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................83
Audio Control .................................................84
Voice Control ..................................................85
Cruise Control .................................................85
Information Display Control .....................86
Heated Steering Wheel ..............................86
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals ....................................87
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers .......................................88
Autowipers ......................................................88
Windshield Washers ....................................89
Lighting
General Information ....................................90
Lighting Control .............................................90
Autolamps ........................................................91
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................91
Daytime Running Lamps ............................92
Automatic High Beam Control .................92
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................93
Direction Indicators ......................................94
Spot Lamps ....................................................94
Interior Lamps ................................................95
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................97
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................98
Interior Mirror ..................................................101
Sliding Windows ..........................................102
Sun Visors .......................................................102
Moonroof ........................................................102
Instrument Cluster
Gauges ............................................................104
Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............107
Audible Warnings and Indicators .............111
Information Displays
General Information ....................................112
Information Messages ...............................124
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control ............................142
Automatic Climate Control ......................143
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
.........................................................................145
Heated Windshield .....................................148
Heated Rear Window .................................148
Heated Exterior Mirrors .............................148
Cabin Air Filter ..............................................148
Remote Start ................................................148
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position .................150
Head Restraints ...........................................150
Manual Seats ................................................152
Power Seats ...................................................153
Memory Function ........................................156
Rear Seats .......................................................157
Heated Seats .................................................157
Ventilated Seats ..........................................159
Front Seat Armrest .....................................159
Rear Seat Armrest ......................................160
2
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ...............161
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................165
Storage Compartments
Center Console .............................................167
Overhead Console ......................................168
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ...................................169
Ignition Switch ..............................................169
Keyless Starting ...........................................170
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without:
Push Button Start ...................................170
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With:
Push Button Start ...................................170
Starting a Gasoline Engine ........................171
Starting a Diesel Engine ............................174
Switching Off the Engine ..........................178
Engine Block Heater ...................................178
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop ..........................................180
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .....................................183
Fuel Quality - Diesel ...................................183
Fuel Quality - E85 .......................................186
Fuel Quality - Gasoline ..............................187
Fuel Filler Funnel Location - Regular Cab
........................................................................188
Fuel Filler Funnel Location - SuperCab/
SuperCrew .................................................188
Running Out of Fuel ...................................188
Refueling ........................................................189
Fuel Consumption .......................................192
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................193
Catalytic Converter .....................................194
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
........................................................................196
Diesel Particulate Filter ............................200
Transmission
Automatic Transmission .........................206
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................212
Rear Axle
Electronic Locking Differential ..............220
Brakes
General Information ...................................222
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
........................................................................222
Electric Parking Brake ................................223
Hill Start Assist ............................................224
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ...............................226
Using Traction Control ..............................226
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ................................227
Using Stability Control ..............................228
Hill Descent Control
Principle of Operation ...............................230
Using Hill Descent Control ......................230
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ...............................232
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................232
3
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Active Park Assist .......................................233
Rear View Camera ......................................237
360 Degree Camera ..................................240
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation ...............................243
Using Cruise Control ..................................243
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ..............244
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ......................................................251
Lane Keeping System ................................252
Blind Spot Information System ............256
Cross Traffic Alert .......................................260
Steering ..........................................................263
Pre-Collision Assist ....................................264
Drive Control ................................................268
Load Carrying
Load Retaining Fixtures ............................270
Load Limit .......................................................271
Bed Access ....................................................275
Bed Ramps ....................................................276
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................279
Trailer Reversing Aids .................................281
Trailer Sway Control ...................................291
Recommended Towing Weights ...........291
Essential Towing Checks .........................303
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......310
Driving Hints
Breaking-In .....................................................313
Economical Driving .....................................313
Off-Road Driving ..........................................314
Driving Through Water ...............................315
Floor Mats ......................................................316
Snowplowing .................................................317
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance .................................320
Hazard Flashers ............................................321
Fuel Shutoff ...................................................321
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................322
Post-Crash Alert System .........................324
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................324
Towing Points ...............................................325
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ..............327
In California (U.S. Only) ...........................328
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................329
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................330
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................330
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
........................................................................332
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
........................................................................332
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
........................................................................332
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart .........................334
Changing a Fuse ..........................................342
Maintenance
General Information ..................................344
Opening and Closing the Hood .............344
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™
........................................................................345
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L V6, Diesel
........................................................................346
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L Duratec -
V6 .................................................................347
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................348
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L Modular -
V8 .................................................................348
4
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Engine Oil Dipstick - Gasoline ...............349
Engine Oil Dipstick - Diesel .....................350
Engine Oil Check - Gasoline ...................350
Engine Oil Check - Diesel ..........................351
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................352
Engine Coolant Check ...............................353
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................357
Transfer Case Fluid Check .......................357
Brake Fluid Check .......................................358
Power Steering Fluid Check ...................358
Washer Fluid Check ...................................358
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap ......358
Fuel Filter - Diesel .......................................359
Fuel Filter - Gasoline .................................359
Changing the 12V Battery ........................359
Checking the Wiper Blades .....................361
Changing the Wiper Blades .....................361
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................362
Changing a Bulb ..........................................363
Bulb Specification Chart ..........................367
Changing the Engine Air Filter - Gasoline
.......................................................................369
Changing the Engine Air Filter - Diesel
.......................................................................369
Vehicle Care
General Information ...................................372
Cleaning Products .......................................372
Cleaning the Exterior ..................................372
Waxing ............................................................374
Cleaning the Engine ...................................374
Cleaning the Exhaust ................................374
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................375
Cleaning the Interior ...................................375
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens .......................376
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................377
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............378
Cleaning the Wheels .................................378
Vehicle Storage ............................................378
Body Styling Kits ........................................380
Wheels and Tires
General Information ...................................381
Tire Care .........................................................383
Using Snow Chains ....................................397
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........398
Changing a Road Wheel .........................404
Technical Specifications ...........................412
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................414
Engine Specifications - 3.0L V6, Diesel
.........................................................................414
Engine Specifications - 3.3L Duratec -
V6 ..................................................................415
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™
.........................................................................415
Engine Specifications - 5.0L Modular -
V8 ..................................................................416
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™......417
Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L V6, Diesel .........417
Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L Duratec - V6
.........................................................................418
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™......419
Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L Modular - V8
.........................................................................419
Vehicle Identification Number ..............420
Vehicle Certification Label .......................421
Transmission Code Designation ...........422
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™...............................................423
Capacities and Specifications - 3.0L V6,
Diesel ...........................................................427
Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L
Duratec - V6 ..............................................431
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™...............................................436
5
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Capacities and Specifications - 5.0L
Modular - V8 .............................................441
Audio System
General Information ..................................447
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD
.......................................................................448
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
SYNC Without Touchscreen ..............453
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Touchscreen Display .............................454
Digital Radio .................................................456
Satellite Radio .............................................458
USB Port .........................................................461
SYNC™
General Information ..................................462
Using Voice Recognition ..........................463
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........465
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......466
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................470
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ..........................471
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................479
Home Screen ...............................................490
Using Voice Recognition ...........................491
Entertainment .............................................498
Climate ..........................................................508
Phone ..............................................................510
Navigation ......................................................516
Apps ................................................................524
Settings ...........................................................527
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ......................541
Accessories
Accessories ...................................................555
Ford Protect
Ford Protect .................................................558
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......560
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........563
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................566
Scheduled Maintenance Record ...........573
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............584
End User License Agreement ................586
Type Approvals .............................................612
6
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
7
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
8
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Hill descent control
E271982
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact
information), to offer you products or
services that may interest you. Data may
be provided to our service providers such
9
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
as part suppliers that may help diagnose
malfunctions, and who are similarly
obligated to protect data. We retain this
data only as long as necessary to perform
these functions or to comply with law. We
may provide information where required
in response to official requests to law
enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with
lawful authority or court order, and such
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by Ford
Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ 3 (page 479).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
•How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
•Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
10
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ 3 (page 479).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™ 3
(page 479).
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us, and to manage your
account.
Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to Account Manager, go to
www.ford.com/finance.
11
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
see the Warranty Guide that is provided
to you along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or serious
injury to yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
12
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and
utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Manual carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate your
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
See Snowplowing (page 317).
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle does not have the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package.
Using a Slide-In Camper
For information regarding the use of
slide-in campers, consult the Truck
Camper Loading document supplied with
your vehicle.
Note: We do not recommend using a
slide-in camper on an F-150 SuperCrew.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
13
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor
Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
15
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
E178396
Wiper lever. See Windshield
Wipers (page 88).
A
Information display controls. See
General Information (page
112).
B
Instrument cluster. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page
107).
C
Audio controls. See Audio
Control (page 84).
D
Audio system. See Audio
System (page 447).
E
Hill descent control. See Using
Hill Descent Control (page 230).
F
Information and entertainment
display.
G
360 degree parking aid camera
button. See 360 Degree
Camera (page 240).
H
Climate controls. See Climate
Control (page 142).
I
Auxiliary power point. See
Auxiliary Power Points (page
165).
J
Integrated trailer brake
controller. See Essential
Towing Checks (page 303).
K
Four-wheel drive control. See
Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
212).
L
16
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
At a Glance
Start button. See Keyless
Starting (page 170).
M
Voice control. See Voice
Control (page 85).
N
Cruise control switches. See
Cruise Control (page 85).
Adaptive cruise control switches.
See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 244).
O
Electric parking brake switch.
See Electric Parking Brake
(page 223).
P
Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 90). Front fog
lamps. See Front Fog Lamps
(page 93). Instrument Lighting
Dimmer See Instrument
Lighting Dimmer (page 91).
Spot Lamps See Spot Lamps
(page 94).
Q
17
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
18
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
•You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 49).
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
19
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Except Front Center Position of
Super Cab and Crew Cab)
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
•Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
restraint and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
•Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
20
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure the belt
webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the seatbelt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
21
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the seatbelt out of the
retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you
should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked,
unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle helps to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
(Front Center Position of Super
Cab and Crew Cab)
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
22
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Always use both the lap
and shoulder portion of the seatbelt in the
center seating position.
The belt webbing below the tongue is the
lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt. The seatbelt webbing above
the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in the
front center seat.
E162708
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142530
3. While holding both shoulder and lap
portions next to the tongue, route the
tongue and webbing through the child
restraint according to the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions. Be sure
that the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
23
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142533
5. While pushing down with your knee on
the child restraint, pull up on the
shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap
belt portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and
remove any slack in the belt to securely
tighten the child safety seat in the
vehicle.
7. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
8. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear
Seat Outermost Positions) (If
Equipped)
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
24
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
25
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
26
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the vehicle seat backrest and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
one top tether anchor behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, the seatbelt can still
be used to attach the child restraint if the
lower anchors are not used. For
forward-facing child restraints, the top
tether strap must also be attached to the
proper top tether anchor, if a top tether
strap has been provided with your child
restraint.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the following
seating positions (LATCH is not available
on Regular Cab):
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E166694
27
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E166695
The lower LATCH anchors are at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat backrest. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions to
properly install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.
Follow the instructions later in this chapter
on attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors
from the Outermost Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 25.7 in
(652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. You cannot install achild
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child restraints (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit use with the anchor
spacing stated. Do not attach a child
restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child restraint is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
28
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
The passenger seats of your vehicle may
have built-in tether strap anchors behind
the seats.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
loops of webbing above the seat backrest
or an anchor bracket behind the seat on
the rear edge of the seat cushion.
The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super
Cab has three straps along the top of the
seat back that function as both routing
loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Regular Cab
E166696
Crew Cab and Super Cab
E166697
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child
restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when
the child is seated in it. Keep the tether
strap just snug without lifting the front of
the child restraint. Keeping the child
restraint just touching the vehicle seat
gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Once you have installed the child safety
seat using either the seatbelt, the lower
anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you
can attach the top tether strap.
Front Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Regular Cab)
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat and under the
head restraint.
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether
strap over the top of the seat backrest.
29
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position. You may
need to pull the seat backrest forward
to access the tether anchors. Make sure
the seat is locked in the upright position
before installing the child restraint.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
Regular Cab passenger and center
seats (on back panel)
E175295
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
Rear Seat Tether Strap
Attachment (Crew Cab and Super
Cab)
E167009
There are three loops of webbing just
above the back of the rear seat (along the
bottom edge of the rear window). Use
these loops as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child safety
seat tether straps.
For example, you can use the center loop
as a routing loop for a child safety seat in
the center rear seat and as an anchoring
loop for child restraints installed in the
outermost rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if
the tether strap is hooked to the loop
directly behind the child restraint.
To provide a tight tether strap:
E162715
30
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
1. Route the vehicle tether loop between
the head restraint posts, then route the
child restraint tether strap through the
loop, forward of the head restraint.
2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether
anchor loop in the adjacent seating
position. If using the driver side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt for
the center seat. Always put the tether
strap through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post holds the
child restraint tightly, but the head
restraint post is not strong enough to
hold the child restraint during a crash.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they
reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
•Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
31
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
32
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap when
your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
33
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined
Weight of
Child and
Child
Restraint
Restraint
Type
Seatbelt
Only
Seatbelt
and LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
Seatbelt
and Top
Tether
Anchor
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
Only)
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
34
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
150).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped)
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
35
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of the
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
safety belt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle
and one tongue that are designed to be
used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all
children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats
can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat
occupants, including pregnant women,
should wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•Lap and shoulder safety belts.
•Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
•Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
•Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
36
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
E71880
•Safety belt warning light and chime.
E67017
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the pretensioners will be
activated when the Safety Canopy is
activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using the Seatbelt with Cinch
Tongue (Front Center Seat)
The cinch tongue slides up and down the
seatbelt webbing when you stow the belt
or when you put the seatbelts on. When
you buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt,
the cinch tongue allows you to shorten the
lap portion, but pinches the webbing to
keep the lap portion from getting longer.
The cinch tongue is designed to slip during
a crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
either the lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a lap and
shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it.
37
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
E162708
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some
seatbelt webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below the
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion)
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue up.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the
retractor so that the shoulder belt
portion of the seatbelt crosses your
shoulder and chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the
belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for your seating position until
you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue to the buckle by pulling on the
tongue.
While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the
lap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongue
adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle
receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the seatbelt locks and helps reduce
your forward movement.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
38
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,
turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time you install a child
safety seat in a front outboard passenger
seating position in a Regular Cab,
SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating
position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
optional front seat center seatbelt has a
cinch mechanism. Properly restrain
children 12 years old and under in a rear
seat whenever possible. See Child Safety
(page 18).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
39
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
Rear Outboard Inflatable Seatbelts
Second Row Only– If Equipped
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire
belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
•An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
•Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
•The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
•Impact sensors in various parts of the
vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.
40
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,
rollovers and some side impact crashes.
The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt
did not inflate in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt
height adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure to
adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E145664
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
41
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the seatbelt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects you place
in the front passenger seat, only the front
seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
42
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
ThenIf
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your seatbelts before you switch the igni-
tion on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after
you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
The seatbelt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING: While the system allows
you to deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled,
it will be re-enabled during the use of
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 62).
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
•The parking brake is set.
•The transmission is in park (P).
•The ignition is off.
•The driver and front passenger seatbelt
is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 30 seconds.
43
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
seatbelt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light
turns on.
4. While the seatbelt warning light is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
•This switches the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
•This switches the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 372).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by Ford Motor
Company dealers. The dealer will provide
an extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the fit of the belt across the
torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
44
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.
45
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System
consists of:
•Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
•Front seat outboard seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
•Driver seat position sensor.
•Front passenger sensing system.
•Passenger airbag status indicator.
•Front crash severity sensors.
•Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
•Restraint system warning lamp and
tone.
•The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, driver
seat position sensor, front passenger
sensing system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
46
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
safety belt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: Always transport
children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Never place your arm
over the airbag module as a deploying
airbag can result in serious arm fractures
or other injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child seat. Never place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move the seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses
as you could be seriously injured or killed.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
avoid risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has
deployed, the airbag will not function again
and must be replaced immediately. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area
will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
47
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or
any objects over an airbag module. Placing
your arm over a deploying airbag can result
in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag
inflation area may cause those objects to
be propelled by the airbag into your face
and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child seat. Never place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat upon which the child seat is
installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
•driver and passenger airbag modules.
•front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 54).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between an occupant’s
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.
48
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child seat. Never place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move the seat
all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should not incur
risk of serious injury from the airbags.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
E181984
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator which
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled). The indicator
lamp is in the center stack of the
instrument panel.
Note: When you first switch the ignition on,
the passenger airbag status indicator off
and on lamps illuminate for a short period
to confirm it is functional.
49
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions:
•The front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
•The system determines an infant is
present in a child restraint.
•A passenger takes their weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
•If there is a problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing
system.
Even with this technology, parents are
strongly encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat.
•When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the off lamp and stays lit
to remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
•If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the on lamp, then
switch your vehicle off, remove the
child restraint from your vehicle and
reinstall the restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions.
The front passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the front
passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled.
•When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp and remains
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
status indicator off lamp is lit, it is possible
that the person is not sitting properly in the
seat. If this happens:
•Switch your vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in an
upright position.
•Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
•Restart your vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This allows the system
to detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
•If the indicator off lamp remains lit
even after this, you should advise the
person to ride in the rear seat.
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator off lamp illuminates, the passenger
side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled
to avoid the risk of airbag deployment
issues.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
If you think that the state of the passenger
airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,
check for the following:
•Objects lodged underneath the seat.
•Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
50
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
•Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
•Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
•Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
•Cargo interference with the seat
•Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
•Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the previous list.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 54).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering
with the seat, please take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
•Pull your vehicle over.
•Switch your vehicle off.
•Driver or adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat
or cargo interfering with the seat.
•Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
•Restart your vehicle.
•Wait at least two minutes and verify
that the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster is no longer
illuminated.
•If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument cluster remains illuminated,
this may or may not be a problem due
to the front passenger sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact your
Customer Relationship Center.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
51
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the airbag, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing
an airbag as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will not function
again. The side airbag system (including
the seat) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
•Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
•Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
54).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
52
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
•Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 54).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
53
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your vehicle
(including hood, bumper system, frame,
front end body structure, tow hooks and
hood pins) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify or add equipment to
the front end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors that provide information
to the restraints control module which
deploys (activates) the front seatbelt
pretensioners, optional rear inflatable
seatbelts, driver airbag, passenger airbag,
seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety
Canopy®. Based on the type of crash, the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
104). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.
•The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern repeats periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration).
•The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners and rear inflatable
seatbelts is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
•The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
•The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
54
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
•Weather conditions.
•Nearby radio towers.
•Structures around the vehicle.
•Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
Other short-distance radio transmitters,
such as amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote
controls and alarm systems may operate
on the same frequency as your remote
control. If other transmitters are operating
on those frequencies, you may not be able
to use your remote control. Using your
remote control near some types of
electronic equipment, such as USB devices,
computers or cell phones can interfere with
remote operation. Operating your remote
control near metal or metallic-finished
purses, bags or clothing can interfere with
remote operation. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
still operates if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
•You touch the inside of the front
exterior door handle within 3 ft (1 m)
proximity of an intelligent access key.
•You press the tailgate release button.
•You press a button on the remote
control.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the remote
control battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote Control
(page 55).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
55
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E191532
Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E218399
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
56
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E218400
Press the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
112).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E191533
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
57
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery.
E218400
1. Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.
58
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E218401
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
59
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes,
do not use remote start if your vehicle is
parked indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 142). A manual
climate control system will run at the
setting it was set to when you switched
your vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if:
•The ignition is on.
•The alarm system triggers.
•You disable the feature.
•The hood is open.
•The transmission is not in park (P).
•The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
•The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback (If
Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful
Solid red
Request failed or
status not received
Blinking red
Status incompleteBlinking green
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
60
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the
duration extends by another 15 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 10
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 30 minutes. You can extend
the engine running time duration to a
maximum of 30 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps
turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running
vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access
key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 156).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 77).
61
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
•Create a MyKey.
•Program configurable MyKey settings.
•Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
•The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
•Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
•Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
•Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).
Note: When you switch lane departure
warning off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
•A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe
speed considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
62
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
•Various vehicle speed reminders so you
know when your vehicle approaches
the limits. Warnings appear in the
information display and an audible
warning sounds when you exceed the
limit.
•Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
•Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey.
To create a MyKey:
1. Place your key into the ignition or, if
your vehicle is equipped with keyless
start, place your transmitter into the
backup position. Details on the backup
position's location are in another
chapter. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 77).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu using your
left-hand-side steering wheel controls.
4. Depending on your display options,
select either Settings or Advanced
Settings, then MyKey and finally
Create MyKey.
5. When the menu reads Hold OK to
Create MyKey, press and hold the OK
button to program a MyKey.
6. The display then prompts you to
program the Configurable settings.
You can program the configurable features
now or at any time. You can advance
through the settings without programming
them by pressing the OK button. MyKey
then keeps all of the default settings.
When you finish programming your MyKey,
the Type 3 information display adds a
confirmation screen, New MyKey Has
Been Created. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your configurable MyKey settings.
1. Place your admin key into the ignition
or, if your vehicle is equipped with
keyless start, place your admin
transmitter into the backup position.
Details on the backup position's
location are in another chapter. See
Passive Anti-Theft System (page
77).
2. Depending on your display options,
select either Settings or Advanced
Settings, then MyKey and finally to
various configurable features.
3. Scroll down through the choices, and
then highlight the feature you want to
configure.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the engine off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
The programmed restrictions apply when
you key off, open and close the driver door
and restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or transmitter.
63
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear all MyKeys within the same
key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch your ignition off, however, you will
need to use an admin key to clear your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status at once.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings,
use the information display and the
left-hand-side steering wheel controls:
1. Access the main menu and select
Settings, then MyKey and finally
Clear MyKeys.
2. Press and hold OK.
3. When you finish clearing all MyKeys,
the Type 3 information display adds a
confirmation screen, MyKey Cleared.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 112).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
64
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. •The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
•Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 77).
•SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 63).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 63).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
65
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 77).
I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. •The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
•An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
•The key system has been reset.
•An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 63).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
66
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your doors and tailgate. See Tailgate
(page 72).
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door. Press the button
again within three seconds to
unlock all doors. The direction indicators
flash. The direction indicators flash twice
to confirm the change. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows your entire vehicle to unlock with
one press of the button.
Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks
your entire vehicle when you disable
two-stage unlocking.
Locking the Vehicle
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the direction indicators flash
if all the doors are closed.
Mislock
If any door is open, or if the hood is open
on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn sounds twice and
the direction indicators do not flash.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
•Your vehicle battery has no charge.
•The key battery has no charge.
•The key frequencies are jammed.
67
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
Note: The system may not function if the
key is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 55).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248555
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248556
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
Note: Do not use the outside door handle
as a roof cargo strap.
At the Electronic Tailgate (If Equipped)
E187693
Press the exterior tailgate release button
inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate
unlocks and opens. See Electronic
Tailgate (page 72).
Smart Unlock (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
If you leave your key in the ignition, when
you open the driver door and lock your
vehicle with the power door lock control,
the doors lock then unlock.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
•Using the manual lock on the inside of
the door.
•Locking the driver door with a key.
•Using the keyless entry keypad.
•Using the lock button on the remote
control.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
68
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
When you lock your vehicle using the
power door lock control (with the door
open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your
vehicle searches for an intelligent access
key in the passenger compartment after
you close the door. If your vehicle finds a
key, all of the doors immediately unlock.
In order to override the smart unlock
feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside your vehicle,
you can lock your vehicle after all doors
are closed by using the keyless entry
keypad, pressing the lock button on
another intelligent access key or touching
the locking area on the handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if the
ignition is on.
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
•All doors are closed.
•The ignition is on.
•You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
•Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
•You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
•Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
•The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
•Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
•You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 112).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
•The ignition is on.
•You press the remote control lock
button.
•After 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp does not turn on if the
control is set to the off position.
The lights do not turn off if:
•You switch them on with the dimmer
control.
•Any door is open.
69
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
Battery Saver
The battery saver turns off the interior
lamps 30 minutes after you switch off the
ignition if a door is open and the dome
lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior
lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp
switch is off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after
you close all of the doors.
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD (if Equipped)
The keypad is near the driver window and
illuminates when you touch it.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E190936
You can use the keypad to:
•Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
•Program and erase user codes.
•Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own five-digit personal entry
codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must enter each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code one.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To Program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step4:
•Press 3·4 to save personal code two.
•Press 5·6 to save personal code three.
•Press 7·8 to save personal code four.
•Press 9·0 to save personal code five.
Tips:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
•The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
70
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
•One minute of keypad inactivity.
•Pressing the unlock button on the
remote control.
•Switching the ignition on.
•Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See General
Information (page 112).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
To Release the Tailgate (If Equipped)
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 5·6 control within five
seconds.
71
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
TAILGATE LOCK
The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of
the tailgate.
E224958
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.
Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn
it to the right to unlock the tailgate.
MANUAL TAILGATE (If Equipped)
E187692
1. Unlock the tailgate.
2. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle
to release the tailgate.
ELECTRONIC TAILGATE (If
Equipped)
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Make sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
The electronic tailgate release will not
operate when:
•The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
•The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
With the Remote Control
E191530
Press the remote control button
twice within three seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access transmitter is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the
tailgate will unlock when you press the
tailgate release button.
72
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Tailgate
E187693
2. Press the button in the top of the
tailgate handle.
3. Push the tailgate up to close the
tailgate.
Note: The electronic tailgate is not a
powered tailgate. The use of a tonneau
cover or other aftermarket accessories,
freezing conditions or being parked downhill
may stop your tailgate from opening
automatically after it is unlatched. You may
need to pull the handle to open the tailgate
if the tailgate does not automatically lower
after being unlatched.
REMOVING THE TAILGATE
WARNING: Always properly secure
cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo
falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in compromised vehicle
stability and serious personal injury to
vehicle occupants or others.
You can remove the tailgate for more
loading room.
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does
not have power door locks.
E189556
1. Locate and disconnect the power door
locks in-line connector. It is under the
pickup box on the right-hand side of
the vehicle near the spare tire.
2. There is a protective cap in the glove
box. Install it on the in-line connector
that remains under the pickup box.
3. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and
the bumper and place it out of the way
under the pickup box.
4. Lower the tailgate.
E163092
5. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
73
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Tailgate
7. Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from
horizontal.
8. Lift the right side off its hinge.
9. Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from
horizontal.
10. Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
Use the step to make entering the truck
bed easier.
To reduce the risk of falling:
•Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
•Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
•Always open the step panel to widen
the step.
•Always use the grab handle when
climbing on the step.
•Do not use the step with bare feet.
•Make sure the step is clean before use.
•Keep the step load, you plus the load,
below 350 lb (159 kg).
Opening the Step
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Do not
drive with the step or grab handle open.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Push the button in the center of the
step molding. The step pops out
slightly.
E187718
3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step
to its lowest position.
E189557
4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward
out of the tailgate until it fully extends.
5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal
to vertical until you hear a click. You
have locked the handle in place.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears as worn or
damaged.
74
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Tailgate
Closing the Step
1. Press the yellow button on the
telescoping handle to lower the handle,
then press the yellow lever at the
bottom of the handle to unlock the
handle. Rotate the handle down from
vertical to horizontal and push it into
the tailgate.
2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,
then push it back into the tailgate until
the step is secure.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the
tailgate when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
Tailgate Mode
E163095
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
E163096
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
E163097
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E163098
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
75
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Tailgate
E163099
5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into
the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.
Grocery Mode
E163100
Follow Steps 1-4 of the Tailgate Mode
instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
76
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Tailgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent the engine from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, the system has
malfunctioned. A message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the system.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle may have two integrated
keyhead transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key. It
operates all the locks, starts the vehicle
and acts as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost
or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need
to erase the key codes from your vehicle
and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. Contact an authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of six
coded keys to your vehicle. All six can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle.
This procedure programs both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
77
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Security
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds
until you hear the door locks cycle.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
The key starts the engine if programming
is successful. You can operate the remote
entry system if the new key is an integrated
keyhead transmitter.
If programming was not successful, wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
Note: If your programmed transmitters are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer. You need to
erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys. Store an extra
programmed key away from your vehicle in
a safe place to help prevent any
inconvenience. Contact an authorized dealer
to purchase additional spare or replacement
keys.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access keys readily accessible.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.
Make sure that your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that
you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout
the procedure. Perform all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop
and wait for at least one minute before
starting again if you perform any steps out
of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
78
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Security
Type One
E244507
Type Two
E187577
1. Place the first programmed key in the
backup slot (A) in the center console,
then press the push button ignition
switch. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition.
2. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot. Press the push button
ignition switch. After three seconds but
within 10 seconds of switching the
ignition off, insert the second previously
coded key into the ignition.
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent
access key in the backup slot and press
the push button ignition switch. After
three seconds but within 10 seconds
of switching the ignition off and
removing the previously programmed
coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
79
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Security
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
The active anti-theft system is designed
to warn you in the event of unauthorized
vehicle entry and is also designed to help
prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by
arming the system in different ways. See
Information Displays (page 112).
The direction indicators flash and the horn
sounds if the system triggers while the
alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Using the System
You can select two levels of alarm security.
You can change the level of security when
the ignition is switched off through the
information display with the two options
below:
Reduced Guard (If Equipped)
Reduced guard monitors the following:
•Doors.
•Hood.
•Tailgate.
Full Guard (If Equipped)
Full guard monitors the following:
•Doors.
•Hood.
•Tailgate.
•Movement inside your vehicle.
•Change in vehicle inclination, for
example, unwanted towing.
Note: Do not choose full monitor mode
when the vehicle is in transport or if
movement within the vehicle is likely to
occur.
Note: For correct operation of the interior
motion detection system, make sure you
close all the windows prior to arming the
system. This helps prevent accidental alarm
activation due to external influences.
Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system does not arm if any door is ajar.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle
using the remote control or keyless entry
keypad. You can also lock your vehicle
using the lock sensor on the exterior door
handle if your vehicle is equipped with
intelligent access. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 67).
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock your vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully
arms after 20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
•Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad. If
equipped with intelligent access, you
can use the unlock sensor on the
exterior door handle. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 67).
•Switch the ignition on or start your
vehicle.
•Use a key in the driver door lock
cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then
switch the ignition on within 12
seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control stops the horn and direction
indicators, but does not disarm the system.
80
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Security
USING POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
WARNING: In extreme climates,
excessive ice buildup may occur, causing
the running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any object
under your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door.
This can help you enter and exit your
vehicle.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after
a two-second delay.
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Advanced Settings.
3. Select Vehicle.
4. Select Power Running Boards.
5. Select your desired power running
board setting.
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).
81
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display.
•When disabled, the running boards
move to the stowed position regardless
of the door position.
•When enabled, the running boards
move back to the correct positions
based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
82
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 150).
E261502
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E261503
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 150).
83
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Steering Wheel
E261582
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
•Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
•Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 156).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 112).
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
84
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Steering Wheel
E191327
Volume up.A
Media.B
Seek up or next.C
Volume down.D
Seek down or previous.E
Media
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
•Play the next or previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
•Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E191328
Mute.A
Voice recognition.B
End call.C
Answer or make a call.D
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type One
E191329
See Using Cruise Control (page 243).
85
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E248613
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 244).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E191336
See Information Displays (page 112).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and
off using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
86
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Never use the pedal
adjustment controls when your feet are on
the accelerator or brake pedal when the
vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in park (P).
Depending on your vehicle and equipment
level, the shape and location of your
power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
•If your control is vertical, then it is to
the left of the steering column and on
the instrument panel.
•If your control is horizontal, then it is on
the left side of the steering column.
Vertical Control
E176213
Farther.A.
Closer.B.
Horizontal Control
A B
E162916
Farther.A.
Closer.B.
Both horizontal and vertical controls
operate the same way:
1. Press and hold A to move the pedals
away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals
closer to you.
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 156).
87
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Pedals
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E172816
•Rotate away from you for a long wipe
interval.
•Rotate toward you for a short wipe
interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: The courtesy wipe feature turns on
after using the windshield washers to
remove any excess washer fluid and debris.
You can adjust the courtesy wipe settings
in the instrument display.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
E172817
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
88
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wipers and Washers
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
•Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
•Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
•Switch autowipers off.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E172818
•A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
•A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
•A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 112).
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This could
cause the washer pump to overheat.
89
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
•A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
•A water puddle inside the lamp.
•Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
Headlamp High Beam
E167827
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
90
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
•During a single wipe.
•When using the windshield washers.
•If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
E231828
91
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Type One - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type Two - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 112).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns off high beams
before they can distract other road users.
Low beams remain on.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
92
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
•The ambient light level is low enough.
•There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
•The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
The high beams turn off if:
•The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
•The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
•The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
•The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
•The camera is blocked.
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
112).
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Autolamps
(page 91).
Overriding the System
When you switch on the high beams,
pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
temporary override to low beam.
Automatic High Beam Indicator (If
Equipped)
The indicator lamp illuminates
to confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
E210814
Press the button to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
off.
93
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped)
The spot lamps are on the forward-facing
side of the exterior mirrors. Switch on the
spot lamps by pressing the buttons above
the lighting control with the parking lamps
on.
E176842
When switching on the spot lamps, the
area in front of and to the side of your
vehicle illuminates.
Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by
moving the position of the exterior mirrors.
For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim
of the lamps by folding the exterior mirrors
into or away from the windows. For
power-folding mirrors, use the switch on
the driver-side door.
Note: The spot lamps turn off when you
reach a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps
(If Equipped)
The cargo lamps are in the central high
mounted stop lamp, and to either side of
the cargo box.
The trailer hookup lamp is on the tailgate
next to the handle.
E189587
Pressing the button in the
lighting control panel or the
button in the cargo box near the
lamp turns on both of these lamps.
E190880
94
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
If you switch on the cargo lamps, the cargo
and trailer hitch area illuminate.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn off when you reach a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h). They also turn off after 10
minutes, fading gradually to off.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
•You open any door.
•You press a remote control button.
Front Interior Lamps
Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each button on the overhead console
depends upon your vehicle features.
Note: Press the button to switch the door
function off when you open any door. When
the door function is off and you open a door,
the courtesy and door lamps stay off.
Note: Press the button again to switch the
door function back on. When the door
function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps turn on.
Type One
E230569
Driver map lamp.A.
All lamps on.B.
Door function.C.
Passenger map lamp.D.
Type Two
E192153
D D
CA B
All lamps on.A.
Door function.B.
All lamps off.C.
Map lamps.D.
95
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
E187342
All lamps on.A.
Door function.B.
Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped)
Type One
E187343
Type Two
E187345
Press the button to switch the lamps on
or off.
Type Three
E182517
Driver map lamp.A.
Passenger map lamp.B.
96
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power windows. They
may seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E176215
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped)
Press or lift the switch fully and release it.
Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.
Restoring the One-Touch Up Function
You may lose the one-touch function if the
vehicle battery is low.
To reset the function after the battery
recharges:
1. Pull the switch all the way up.
2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
and continue to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the
window to the full down position.
One-touch up will now be functional.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the
bounce-back feature the window will not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
The window will stop if you release the
switch before the window closes fully.
97
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock (If Equipped)
E176216
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
98
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
E277400
This feature lets you extend the mirror
about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when
towing a trailer. You can manually pull out
or push in the mirrors to the desired
position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
E176218
To fold both mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Press the control.
2. Press control again to unfold the
mirrors.
Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway
through their movement. Wait until the
mirrors stop moving and press the control
again.
The left-hand and right-hand mirrors move
at different rates. For example, one mirror
may stop while the other one continues to
move. This is normal.
Moving the mirrors 10 or more times within
one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
•The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
•The mirrors feel loose.
•The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
•One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping
Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature lets you position both mirrors
at the same time.
99
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E176218
To adjust your mirrors, make sure you
switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in
accessory mode or the engine running) and
then:
1. Press and release the control. It lights.
2. Press the adjustment control to
position the mirrors.
•Press the left arrow to extend the
mirrors out. Press the right arrow to
retract the mirrors in.
•Press the up or down arrow to fold
the mirrors toward the window
glass. Press the up or down arrow
again to fold the mirrors out.
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 148).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 156).
Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming
mirror turns on.
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
The lower, outer part of the mirror housings
light when you switch the headlamps or
parking lamps on.
Spot Lamps (If Equipped)
The area lights are on the forward-facing
portion of the mirror housing. You can
switch them on and off by using the
controls located on the instrument panel.
See Lighting (page 90).
360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)
Each mirror includes a camera.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the mirror are
closer than they appear.
100
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle. The blind spot mirror
is only on the driver exterior mirror.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 256).
INTERIOR MIRROR
Manual Dimming Mirror
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
101
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped)
Power Sliding Back Window (If
Equipped)
WARNING: When operating the
power sliding back window, you must
make sure all rear seat occupants and
cargo are not in the proximity of the back
window.
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power sliding back
window. They may seriously injure
themselves.
E176217
The control is on the overhead console.
Press and hold the control to open the
window. Pull and hold the control to close
the window.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the moonroof. They may
seriously injure themselves.
102
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, you should verify that it is free
of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation,
press the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E191272
Moonroof open.A
Moonroof vent.B
Sunshade open.C
Sunshade close.D
Moonroof close.E
Moonroof Open
Press and release to open the moonroof.
Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully
opened position to reduce wind noise or
rumbling that may happen with the
moonroof fully open. Press and release the
control again to open the moonroof fully.
Moonroof Vent
Press and release to vent the moonroof.
Sunshade Open
Press and release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens automatically with
the moonroof. You can also open the
sunshade with the moonroof closed.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the control again.
Sunshade Close
Press and release to close the sunshade.
Moonroof Close
Press and release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent positions.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses
some distance if an obstacle is detected
while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold (E)
within two seconds after the roof comes
to a stop following a bounce-back reversal.
103
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E271241
Engine oil pressure gaugeA
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
B
Fuel gaugeC
Transmission fluid temperature
or Turbo boost gauge
D
SpeedometerE
Information display See
General Information (page
112).
F
TachometerG
104
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E176091
Engine oil pressure gaugeA
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
B
Fuel gaugeC
Transmission fluid temperature,
Turbo boost or Diesel exhaust
fluid gauge
D
SpeedometerE
Information display See
General Information (page
112).
F
TachometerG
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle
should stay in the normal operating range
(between L and H). If the needle falls
below the normal range, stop your vehicle,
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
105
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge (If Equipped)
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon
as safely possible and verify the airflow is
not restricted (snow or debris blocking
airflow through the grille).
Also, higher than normal operating
temperature can be caused by special
operation conditions (snowplowing, towing
or off-road use). Refer to Special operating
conditions in the scheduled maintenance
information for instructions.
Operating the transmission for extended
periods with the gauge in the higher than
normal area may cause internal
transmission damage. You need to alter
the severity of your driving conditions to
lower the transmission temperature into
the normal range. If the gauge continues
to show high temperatures, see an
authorized dealer.
Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
Indicates the amount of manifold air
pressure in the engine.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
(If Equipped)
Indicates the current DEF level.
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Compass
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
106
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 112).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 112).
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator
(If Equipped)
E144524
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
It illuminates white when the
system is in standby mode. It illuminates
green when you set the adaptive cruise
speed.
See Using Cruise Control (page 243).
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when the system
automatically turns the
headlamp high beam on.
See Automatic High Beam Control
(page 92).
Automatic Regen Control Off (If
Equipped)
E252868
It illuminates if you manually
switch off the automatic regen
control.
See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 200).
Auto-Start-Stop Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when the engine
has automatically stopped. It
flashes to inform you when the
engine needs to restart. The indicator is
shown with a strikethrough if the system
is not available.
See Auto-Start-Stop (page 180).
Battery
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a malfunction.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It illuminates when you switch
the system off.
See Blind Spot Information
System (page 256).
107
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and will
illuminate when:
•You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
•Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates while you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Be sure
that the parking brake is off.
Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible if the lamp
continues to illuminate.
Check 4X4 (If Equipped)
Illuminates with the message
Check 4x4 when a four-wheel
drive fault is present. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 212).
Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
See Using Cruise Control
(page 243).
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (If Equipped)
E163176
With the key in the on position,
illuminates when the DEF is
contaminated, low or someone
has tampered with the DEF system. See
Selective Catalytic Reductant System
(page 196).
Direction Indicator
Flashes when the left or right
direction indicator or the hazard
warning flasher turns on. An
increase in the rate of flashing warns of a
failed indicator bulb.
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on and remains on if
any door or the hood is open.
Electronic Locking Differential (If
Equipped)
E163170
Illuminates when using the
electronic locking differential.
Electric Park Brake (If Equipped)
E146190
It illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 223).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when your vehicle
is moving, this indicates that the
engine is overheating. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 353).
108
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp
E71880
It illuminates and a chime
sounds until you fasten the
seatbelts.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If
Equipped)
Note: Some indicators will appear different
depending on vehicle options.
E181778
Illuminates momentarily when
you select two-wheel drive high.
E181781
Illuminates when the automatic
four-wheel drive system is
engaged.
E181780
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged.
E181779
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive high is engaged.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked.
Front Fog Lamp Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
Headlamp High Beam Indicator
It illuminates when you switch
the headlamp high beam on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
E163171
Illuminates when hill descent is
switched on.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning
Lamp
E132353
It illuminates when the washer
fluid is low.
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. If the oil level is sufficient,
this indicates a system malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil Check (page 350).
109
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when the system has
detected a powertrain or a
four-wheel drive fault. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 193).
Sport Mode
E176099
Illuminates when you switch the
sport mode on.
Stability Control and Traction
Control Indicator
E138639
Flashes during operation.
If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or remains
on when the engine is running, this
indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
See Using Stability Control (page 228).
Stability Control and Traction
Control Off Warning Lamp
E130458
It illuminates when you switch
the system off.
Tow Haul Indicator (If Equipped)
E161509
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.
Wait To Start (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch the
ignition on as part of the
pre-start system. Wait until the
wait to start indicator turns off before
attempting to start vehicle. See Starting
a Diesel Engine (page 174).
Water In Fuel (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not drain the
water-in-fuel separator while the engine
is running. Failure to follow this warning
may result in fire, serious injury, death or
property damage.
110
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
During refueling, it is possible for
you to pump
water-contaminated diesel fuel
into your fuel tank. Your vehicle’s fuel
system is equipped with a fuel filter and
water separator to remove water from the
fuel. The water in fuel indicator lights when
the fuel and water separator has a
significant quantity of water in it and
requires immediate draining.
If the water in fuel indicator illuminates
when the engine is running, stop your
vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off
the engine, then drain the fuel and water
separator. See Fuel Quality (page 183).
Allowing water to stay in the fuel system,
after the water in fuel indicator illuminates,
could result in extensive damage or failure
of the fuel injection system.
Note: Do not drain the fuel and water
separator while the engine is running. Air will
enter into the fuel system causing the engine
not to operate properly.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Airbag Secondary Warning
Sounds if there is a malfunction with the
safety belt warning lamp and there is a
fault in the supplemental restraints
system.
Beltminder Warning
Sounds when a seatbelt is unfastened in
an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.
Door Ajar Warning
Sounds when any door is not completely
closed and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h).
Headlamps On Warning
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Key in Ignition Warning
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Rear Park Aid Warning (If Equipped)
A detection warning sounds when
obstacles are within a certain range of the
bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever you switch the
ignition on.
Parking Brake On Warning
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
Service AdvanceTrac Warning
Sounds when there is a malfunction with
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) or
Rollover Stability Control (RSC) system.
111
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: Trailer options are not available if
your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
MyKey is programmed.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is switched on, and unchecked
indicates the feature is switched off.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1 and 2)
E176092
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
Main menu (Type 1)
•Trip 1 & 2
•Fuel economy
•Driver assist
•Settings
112
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip options.
Trip 1 & 2
Digital Speed - Press OK for km/h
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
DTE
Average Fuel
•Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
•Trip Odometer - Registers the distance of individual journeys.
•Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
•DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
•Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
Fuel Economy
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
113
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
Average Speed
Auto StartStop
•Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running
out of fuel.
•Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
•Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time. Press and hold
OK to reset this value.
•Average Speed - Shows the average speed your vehicle travels.
•Auto StartStop - Shows the current status of the Auto StartStop system.
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different driver setting choices.
Driver Assist
Prog Range SelDriver Assist
DEF Gauge
Exhaust Filter
Engine Hours
Tire Pressure
Trans. Temp.
Rear Park Aid
Brake Type
Brake Effort
Trailer Sway
114
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Settings
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Auto RegenVehicle
DTE Calculate
Lighting
Locks
Neutral Tow
Oil Life Reset
Remote Start
Wiper Controls
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
MyKey StatusMyKey
Create MyKey
911 Assist
Do Not Disturb
AdvanceTrac
Max Speed
Speed Minder
Vol. Limiter
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Clear MyKeys
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
UnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
Main menu (Type 2)
•Display Mode
•Trip/Fuel
•Towing
•Off Road
•Settings
115
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
DEF Status
Exhaust Filter Status
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h
Engine Information
Transmission Temp.
•Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before
running out of fuel.
•DEF Status - Shows DEF status on demand screen and DEF distance to empty.
•Exhaust Filter Status - Shows exhaust filter on demand screen.
•Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 398).
•Engine Information - Shows engine hours and engine idle hours. Hold OK to Reset
•Transmission Temp.- Shows the transmission temperature of your vehicle.
Trip/Fuel
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel options.
Trip/Fuel
Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer, DTE,
odometer and avg fuel economy
Trip 1
Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer, DTE,
odometer and avg fuel economy
Trip 2
Enter the submenu and select your settingFuel Economy
Enter the submenu and select your settingFuel History
Enter the submenu and select your settingCompass
116
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Enter the submenu and select your settingAverage Speed
Auto StartStop
Trip 1 or 2
•Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
•DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
•Odometer - Registers the distance of individual journeys.
•Avg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average fuel
economy.
Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Average Speed - Shows the average speed your vehicle travels.
Auto StartStop - Shows the current status of the Auto StartStop system.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Towing
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
Trailer Connection StatusTrailer Status
BLIS with Trailer Ready/Not Available/Not Setup/Off
Pro Trailer Backup Assist: Ready or Not Setup or Not Calibrated
Active Trailer Name or Default Trailer
Accumulated Trailer Miles
Trailer Brake Gain
Output
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Options Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Select Trailer
117
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Towing
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Change Trailer Settings
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Add Trailer
ConventionalConnection
Checklist Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Off Road
Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different off road choices.
Off Road
Pitch, Steering Angle, Roll, Elocker and
4X4
Off Road Status
Power Distribution
Settings
Settings
Auto Regen
Blind Spot
Cross Traffic Alert
Enter the submenu and select your settingDTE Calcula-
tion
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Easy Entry/ExitVehicleAdvanced
Settings Lighting
Locks
Remote Start
Wiper Controls
118
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
MyKey
UnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
Information Display Controls
(Type 3) (If Equipped)
E176093
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or messages.
Main menu
You can access the menus using the
information display control.
E176094
My View
E176095
Trip/Fuel
E163181
Truck Info
E176096
Towing
E176097
Off Road
E176098
Settings
My View
E176094
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following My View
options.
119
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
MyView
Trip 1
Fuel Economy
Tire Pressure
Off Road Status
Enter the submenu for Trip/
Fuel, Truck Info, Towing and
Off Road selections
Add/Remove ScreensConfigure MyView
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
Reorder Screens
Trip/Fuel
E176095
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following trip and
fuel options.
Trip/Fuel
Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer,
DTE, odometer and avg fuel economy
Trip 1
Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer,
DTE, odometer and avg fuel economy
Trip 2
Enter the submenu and select your settingFuel Economy
Enter the submenu and select your settingFuel History
Enter the submenu and select your settingAverage Speed
120
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Enter the submenu and select your settingNavigation/Compass
Auto StartStop
Trip 1 or 2
•Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.
•DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
•Odometer - Registers the distance of individual journeys.
•Avg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average fuel
economy.
Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Average Speed - Shows the average speed your vehicle travels.
Navigation/Compass - Shows navigation turn by turn or compass direction when a route
is not set.
Auto StartStop - Shows the current status of the Auto StartStop system.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Truck Info
E163181
In this mode, off-road
information depicted with
graphics are available.
Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Truck Info
Gauge View
Tire Pressure
Digital Speedometer
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status
Diesel Exhaust Filter Status
121
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Truck Info
Engine Information
Transmission Temperature
•Gauge View - Shows the turbo boost or transmission temp value.
•Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 398).
•Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.
•Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status - Shows diesel exhaust fluid status on demand screen
and DEF distance to empty.
•Diesel Exhaust Filter Status - Shows exhaust filter on demand screen.
•Engine Information - Shows engine information.
•Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature of your vehicle.
Towing
E176096
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following towing
options.
Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active
trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.
Towing
Enter the submenu for items such as % Grade, steering angle, gain and
output display
Towing
Status
Enter the submenu for items such as Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Pro
Trailer Backup Assist Status and Trailer BLIS Status - Press OK for Trailer
Options
Towing
Informa-
tion
Enter the submenu for items such as Running, Brake and Turn Signal Light
Status or No Trailer Detected
Trailer
Light
Status
Trailer Sway ControlTrailer
Setup Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Select trailer
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Change Trailer Settings
Enter the submenu and select your
setting
Add Trailer
122
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Towing
ConventionalConnec-
tion Check-
list Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
Off Road
E176097
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following off road
options.
Off Road
Pitch, Steering Angle, Roll,
Elocker and 4X4
Off Road Status
Power Distribution
Settings
E176098
Use the arrow buttons to
configure different driver setting
choices.
Settings
Auto Regen
Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alert
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Blind Spot
Enter the submenu for items such as alert sensitivity, distance indication
and active braking
Pre-Collision
Enter the submenu and select your settingCruise
Control
Enter the submenu and select your settingDTE Calcula-
tion
123
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Enter the submenu and select your settingGauge Selec-
tion
Enter the submenu for items such as system modes and alert intensityLane
Keeping
System
Auto Engine OffVehicleAdvanced
Settings Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting
Locks
Alarm
Power Running Boards
Remote Start
Wiper Controls
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
MyKey
UnitsDisplay Setup
Temperature
Tire Pressure
Language
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E184451
124
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display will automatically remove other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Active Park Fault
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
244).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-
tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
244).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
244).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise Active
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control
from engaging.
Front Sensor Not Aligned
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap
distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower
gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
125
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
off.
AdvanceTrac Off
The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it
on.
AdvanceTrac On
The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched
it on.
AdvanceTrac SPORT
MODE
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it off. See Using Traction Control (page 226).
Traction Control Off
The status of the traction control system after you switched
it on. See Using Traction Control (page 226).
Traction Control On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm and Security
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 80).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
126
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the
system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will
operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Charging System Service
Soon
The charging system needs servicing. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Charging System Service
Now
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered.
Battery State of Charge
Low
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-
tion System (page 256).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 256).
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
127
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 256).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 256).
Cross Traffic Alert Deac-
tivated Trailer Attached
The system automatically turns off and displays this message
when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have
a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind
spot system off through the information display. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 256).
Blind Spot Alert Deactiv-
ated Trailer Attached
Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or goose-
neck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or
longer than 33 ft (10 m).
Trailer Blind Spot Not
available Due to Invalid
Trailer
Diesel Messages
WARNING: When the Exhaust Filter
Cleaning message appears in the
information display, do not park near
flammable materials, vapors or structures
until filter cleaning is complete.
128
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine
actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel
Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust
soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust
temperature will return to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL.
Exhaust Filter Cleaning
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off.
Exhaust Filter Over-
loaded Drive to Clean
Exhaust Filter Over-
loaded Clean Now
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h)
until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off.
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Clean Now
Exhaust Filter at Limit
Drive to Clean Now
Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeded the
intended operating range. If this warning occurs, a tone
sounds, followed by reduced engine power. The engine shuts
down when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h) . Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Exhaust System Over-
heated Stop Safely
NOW
In extremely cold weather, typically below -14.8°F (-26°C)
and if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will
not respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds.
This restriction allows your engine to circulate the oil properly
in order to avoid engine damage.
Engine Warming Please
Wait {seconds:00} sec
Your diesel particulate filter is clean.Exhaust Filter Drive
Complete
Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only).Exhaust Filter Cleaned
The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only).Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Stopped
The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining
diesel exhaust fluid.
DEF Level Range: XX mi/
km Refill Now
Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top
speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must
replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle.
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH / km/
h in XX mi/km
129
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed
will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel
exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle.
DEF Level Empty Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/
h Upon Restart
The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the
diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
vehicle.
DEF Level Low Speed
Limited to XX MPH/km/
h
The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust
fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle.
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled Soon
A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system.
The vehicle will enter into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust
fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to
resume normal operation of your vehicle.
DEF Level Empty Engine
Idled See Manual
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed
distance and count down from this point. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h in XX
mi/km
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h Upon
Restart
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed is limited. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Speed Limited
to XX MPH/km/h
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
DEF Fault Engine Idled
Soon
You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Ignoring the Exhaust Filter Over Limit Service Now warning
message could lead to reduced drivability and customer
expense, including damage to the diesel particulate filter.
Your new vehicle warranty may not cover this damage.
Exhaust Filter Over Limit
Service Now
The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity
and needs draining. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 358).
Water in Fuel Drain Filter
A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low
fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. See Fuel Quality
(page 183).
Fuel Pressure Low
130
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The tailgate is not completed closed.Tailgate Ajar
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Drivetrain
ActionMessage
The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.
To Engage Locking
Differential Slow to XX
mph/km/h
The electronic locking differential requests the accelerator
to be released in order to engage.
To Engage Locking
Differential Release
Accelerator Pedal
An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is
present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Locking Differen-
tial
The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission in
Neutral
The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message
indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
131
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Engine
ActionMessage
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless
Starting (page 170).
No Key Detected
You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine
and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key
inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
132
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys
Learned
The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine
is on.
Engine ON
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires you to
clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering
wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%.Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system
immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 358).
Brake Fluid Level Low
133
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. See an author-
ized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode Contact Dealer
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays
that the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
134
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Off Road
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is active.Hill Descent Control Active
Hill descent control mode is inactive.Hill Descent Control OFF
Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode
entry has not been met.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
XX MPH/km/h or Less
You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must
resume control.
Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control
A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off System
Cooling
The hill descent control system is ready.Hill Descent Control Ready
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 232).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 232).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
135
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is
attempted without the brake pedal being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake
and Switch
The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is
attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual
release.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric park brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric park brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric park brake system has been put into a special
mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact
an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Some functionality may still be available.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
The steering lock system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Lock Malfunc-
tion Service Now
136
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not
Available
Pro Trailer Backup Assist
ActionMessage
Pro Trailer Backup Assist can only be activated when
the vehicle is stopped.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Not
Active Stop Vehicle to Activate
Camera System is locating the sticker. Wait until the
sticker is found before attempting to use Pro Trailer
Backup Assist.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Locating Sticker Please wait...
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist has reached max
trailer angle.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
now Maximum trailer angle
Press Knob to Exit
Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist is no longer
controlling steering.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop
Now Take Control of Steering
Wheel
Slow vehicle speed. Vehicle is approaching the exit
speed for the Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Reduce Speed Turn Knob to
Steer Press Knob to Exit
Conditions for Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation are
not met. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 281).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
System is Not Available
Pro Trailer Backup Assist cannot operate with hands
on wheel. Remove hands to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Remove Hands from Steering
Wheel to Activate Press Knob
to Exit
Pro Trailer Backup Assist knob has been pushed to
deactivate the system.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Cancelled by Driver Take
Control of Steering Wheel
Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation is only available in
reverse gear. Shift gear selector into reverse to activate.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Shift
to Reverse to Activate. Press
Knob to Exit
137
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Camera system cannot locate sticker. Shift to park.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Shift to Park
Press Knob to Exit
Camera system cannot locate sticker. See Trailer
Reversing Aids (page 281).
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Sticker Not Found Refer to
Owner's Manual. Press Knob to
Exit
Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h) straight
forward to calibrate Pro Trailer Backup Assist.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Drive Straight Forward to Calib-
rate. Press Knob to Exit
The system has completed calibration. Stop the
vehicle to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature.
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
Calibration Complete Stop
Vehicle
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to push the start button to drive your vehicle after
a remote start.
To Drive: Press Start
Button
Seats
ActionMessage
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} Saved
Side-Wind
ActionMessage
This message displays when the side-wind system turns on
in response to strong wind conditions. See Principle of
Operation (page 227).
Side-Wind Stabilization
Active
138
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .To START Press Brake
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 398).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in
use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Trailer
ActionMessage
The current gain setting for the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0}
The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
trailer is not connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain
value:#0.0} No Trailer
Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a
Trailer (page 279).
Trailer Brake Module Fault
A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
139
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected
The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer
wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 279).
Trailer Wiring Fault
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 279).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 279).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual
4WD
ActionMessage
A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Check 4x4
The 4X4 system is making a shift.4x4 Shift in Progress
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and
your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW
and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N
Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW
and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH
May display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth
blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral
state.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward
140
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the system turns off the clutch due to
excessive stress. The system automatically turns on
the clutch after it cools.
4x4 Temporarily Disabled
Displays when the 4X4 system restores to the 4A
setting.
4x4 Restored
Displays when the 4X4 system temporarily turns on
4H from 4A after detecting driving conditions that
require greater 4X4 performance. The system automat-
ically returns to 4A after the system no longer detects
these driving conditions.
4X4 Temporarily Locked
Displays when the system requires an additional
transmission shift to Neutral to complete a transfer
case shift.
Shift to Neutral
Displays when you command a 4x4 shift during
conditions which are potentially harmful to the drive-
line components
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH
To Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h
Displays when the 4x4 system requests the you release
the accelerator pedal to complete a 4x4 shift. See
Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 212).
To Engage 4x4 Release Acceler-
ator Pedal
141
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E217932
Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
A
Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 157).
B
Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
C
Defrost: Press to distribute air
through the windshield air vents
and de-mister. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice.
D
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
E
142
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.
Temperature control: Adjusts
the temperature of the air
circulated in your vehicle.
F
MAX Defrost: Turn to the right
to switch on defrost. Air flows
through the windshield vents
and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.
G
Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.
MAX A/C: Turn to the left for
maximum cooling. Recirculated
air flows through the instrument
panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to
the highest speed.
H
A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
I
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.
Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
J
Note: At least one of these
buttons illuminates on when the
system is on.
Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated Rear
Window (page 148).
K
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)
143
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
E248538
AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust
A
to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature. You can also
switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.
MAX Defrost: Press to switch
on defrost. The driver and
passenger settings set to HI, air
flows through the windshield
vents, and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.
B
Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.
Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
C
Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
D
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
E
144
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. The driver and
passenger settings set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning turns on and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed.
F
DUAL: Press to switch on
temperature control for the
passenger side of the vehicle.
When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the
same as the driver settings.
G
Passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting on the
passenger side.
H
A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
I
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.
Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 157).
J
Ventilated seats: Press to
switch the ventilated seats on
and off. See Ventilated Seats
(page 159).
K
Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
L
Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated Rear
Window (page 148).
M
Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.
N
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
145
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
2
Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
3
Recommended Settings for Heating
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
3
146
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Select MAX A/C.Select MAX A/C.1
Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
2
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.
3
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press the defrost button.Direct air to the windshield using the air
distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press A/C.2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
4
147
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
HEATED WINDSHIELD (If Equipped)
Windshield Wiper De-Icer
E184884
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the windshield wiper
de-icer turns on.
HEATED REAR WINDOW (If
Equipped)
E184884
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Make sure the engine is on before
operating the heated windows.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle Warranty may not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
(If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
•It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
•It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
•It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 560).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display.
The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.
148
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
•Heated seats.
•Cooled seats.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated mirrors.
•Heated rear window.
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
turn on.
In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display). The heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
149
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the
seatback as this can cause the occupant
to slide under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the seatback to reduce the risk
of serious injury in the event of a crash or
during heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
•Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
•Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
150
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Head Restraint
E138642
Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints
E166700
E
D
C
B
A
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint
E166701
A
DC
B
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button (If Equipped).
D
Fold button (rear seat outboard
only).
E
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint (If
Equipped)
1. Pull up the head restraint until it
reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
151
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
Note: For rear outboard seats, you can fold
the head restraint forward for easier
removal.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
Note: The rear seat outboard head
restraints may fold forward for improved
visibility.
1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset.
Front Seat Center Head Restraint
Your vehicle may have a front row center
head restraint that you cannot adjust or
remove.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, untilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver's
seat or seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E175314
152
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
Recline Adjustment
E175315
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
E166702
The lumbar support control is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
153
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
E176038
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If
Equipped)
E176039
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front
Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. When the seat backrest and
cushion are both active, the massage
alternates between zones.
154
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
E156301
Lumbar and Bolster ModeMassage Mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity
adjustment
A
Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decrease
and off*
B
Lower lumbar**
Cushion massage intensity
adjustment
C
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
*The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature defaults to the middle
lumbar mode.
**Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-Contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-Contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Low or High.
155
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This function automatically recalls the
position of these features:
•Driver seat.
•Power mirrors.
•Optional power steering column.
•Optional power adjustable pedals.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
Note: A confirmation that you saved a
memory preset appears in the information
display.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when you
place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not
moving.
Note: Pressing any of the memory feature
controls during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
•Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if you linked
it to a preset position.
•Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
features to the position you desire.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
156
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in Step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable this feature, it automatically
moves the driver seat position rearward up
to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch the ignition
off. The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
Switch this feature on and off through the
Information displays settings menu. See
General Information (page 112).
Note: After moving the seat to the easy exit
position, pressing any of the memory feature
controls cancels the easy entry return
movement.
REAR SEATS (If Equipped)
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion.
You can flip each seat cushion up into a
vertical storage position.
E181250
Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks
into the vertical storage position.
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position
WARNING: Make sure that cargo or
any objects are not trapped underneath
the seat cushion before returning the seat
cushion to its original position, and that the
seat cushion returns to the full down
position. Failure to do so may prevent the
seat from operating properly in the event
of a crash, which could increase the risk of
serious injury.
E166704
Pull the control on the bottom of the seat
cushion to release the seat cushion from
the storage position.
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
157
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
The rear seat heat controls are on the rear
of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
the on position, press the heated seat
switch to enable heating mode. When
activated, they turn off automatically when
you switch off the engine.
158
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
VENTILATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Note: The ventilated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The ventilated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.
Do not do the following:
•Spill liquid on the front seats. This may
cause the air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
•Place cargo or objects under the seats.
They may block the air intake causing
the air vents to not work properly.
The engine must be running to use this
feature.
E224689
Press this symbol to cycle through the
various ventilation settings and off. More
indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the ventilated seats are on, the feature
turns itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Note: To improve comfort, use the
ventilated seats along with the vehicle’s air
conditioning system.
FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If
Equipped)
E175382
Press the release control to move the front
seat armrest up or down.
E184821
Lift the latch to open the lid and gain
access to the optional storage
compartment under the center seat
cushion.
The cupholder is located inside the front
seat armrest. You can also flip the
cupholder so that it faces forward. See
Center Console (page 167).
159
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E181222
Pull the strap located on the center
seatback to access the armrest and
cupholders.
The cupholders are located inside the rear
seat armrest.
To open the cupholders:
1. Push in gently on the center of the
plastic panel at the front edge of the
armrest. The cupholders will partially
open.
2. Pull the cupholder fully open before
using.
160
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNING: Make sure that the
garage door and security device are free
from obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
161
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
162
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
163
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
164
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 20 amps.
Note: Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points, this may result in damage to
vehicle systems.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 240 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
•Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the engine is off.
•Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Note: Timed power points remain on for 30
minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.
If you switch the vehicle off, the timed
power points remain on for 75 minutes.
Power points may be in the following
locations:
•On the instrument panel.
•Inside the center console.
•On the rear of the center console.
•In the seat bin.
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC
Power Outlet
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 400 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: This feature works only when the
engine is running.
Note: This feature has a maximum output
of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).
Note: While in drive (D), the maximum
outlet output is 300 watts.
Note: When powering electric devices that
require more than 10 watts in vehicles
equipped with keyless start, the engine must
remain running. If the engine is turned off or
you switch the ignition to accessory mode,
plugged in devices will not be charged.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 400 watts. It is
on the instrument panel and rear of the
center console.
165
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
E191617
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
•On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
•Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
•Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
You can use the 400 watt power outlet for
these types of electric devices:
•Electric hand drills.
•Rechargeable power tools.
•Video games.
•Laptops.
•Televisions.
Note: Max 400W - when the vehicle is
parked and 300W - when the vehicle is
driving.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
•Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
•Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
•Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
166
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
In vehicles with a 40-20-40 split-bench
seat, the cup holders are inside of the
folding console.
E185121
To use the cup holders:
1. Lift the console lid up to open.
2. Lift the cup holders up and rotate them
outward.
3. Close the console.
Vehicles with a console-mounted shifter
feature cup holders molded into the
console.
E176222
Front cup holders.A
Rear cup holders.B
E251470
USB ports or audio input jack.A
Auxiliary power point.B
Locking storage compartment
with hanging file folder supports
and room for a laptop computer.
C
AC power point.D
Heated rear seats.E
Auxiliary power point.F
USB port.G
167
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Storage Compartments
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)
E224959
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
168
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)
E252522
A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D (start) - Cranks the engine.
169
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts.
•Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK -
VEHICLES WITHOUT: PUSH
BUTTON START (If Equipped)
WARNING: Always check that the
steering is unlocked before attempting to
move your vehicle.
To lock the steering wheel:
1. Remove the key from the ignition.
2. Rotate the steering wheel 180° from
the straight ahead position to engage
the lock.
To unlock the steering wheel:
1. Insert the key in the ignition.
2. Turn the key to the on position.
Note: You may need to rotate the steering
wheel slightly to assist unlocking if there is
a steering wheel load applied.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH
BUTTON START (If Equipped)
Your vehicle has an electronically
controlled steering wheel lock that
automatically operates.
The steering wheel will lock shortly after
you have parked your vehicle and the
passive key is outside it or when you lock
your vehicle.
Note: The steering wheel will not lock when
the ignition is on or when your vehicle is
moving.
170
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Unlocking the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel unlocks when the
system detects a valid passive key inside
your vehicle. If the steering wheel relocks,
switch the ignition on to unlock it.
Note: You may have to slightly rotate the
steering wheel to assist unlocking it.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
•Turn the ignition key to on. If your
vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, see the following instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to start the engine.
Release the key when the engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in the vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of position P.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
•The key frequencies are jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, locate
the backup slot (A) in one of two positions:
171
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Type One
E244507
Type Two
E187577
1. If your vehicle is equipped with Type
One, make sure to place the key
properly into the backup slot.
2. If your vehicle is equipped with Type
Two, make sure the buttons are facing
the rear of the vehicle and the key ring
up. Place the key into the backup slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, and then the button to
switch on the engine.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart the engine within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if a valid key is not
present.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without
the key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If
you open and close a door while the engine
is running, the system searches for a valid
key. You cannot restart the engine if the
system does not detect a valid key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
172
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic engine shutdown feature.
When you switch it off temporarily, it turns
on at the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the
30-second countdown has expired by
doing any of the following:
•You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
•You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on (for the current ignition cycle
only). Use the information display to
do so. See Information Displays
(page 112).
•During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Turn the key to off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when the vehicle is still moving will result
in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
the transmission selector lever to
position P and turn the key to off.
173
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
the transmission selector lever to
position P.
3. Press and hold the button for one
second, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
•Open the windows at least 1 in
(2.5 cm).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
Read all starting instructions carefully
before you start your vehicle.
For temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
use of the correct grade engine oil is
essential for proper operation. Refer to
Engine oil specifications for more
information. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 423).
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cold
weather starting strategy that prevents
severe engine damage by assisting in
engine lubrication warm-up. In extremely
cold ambient temperatures, this strategy
activates and prevents the accelerator
pedal from being used for 30 seconds after
starting your vehicle. A message will
appear in the information display as your
vehicle warms up. By not allowing the
accelerator pedal to be used, the engine
oil is allowed to properly lubricate the
bearings preventing engine damage due
to lack of proper lubrication. After the 30
second warm-up period, the accelerator
pedal will be operational again and a
message will appear informing you the
vehicle is ok to drive.
When starting the engine in extremely cold
temperatures -15°F (-26°C), it is
recommended to allow the engine to idle
for several minutes before driving the
vehicle.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
•Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
Note: Do not press the accelerator during
starting.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
174
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: If the push button ignition switch is
pressed again prior to the engine starting
the ignition switches to accessory mode and
does not start.
Note: If the brake pedal is released before
the engine has started, follow the engine
start sequence again.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the center of the push button
ignition switch.
Note: A message displays Engine Start
Pending, Please Wait.
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
System
The diesel engine glow system consists of:
•Six or eight glow plugs (one per
cylinder)
•Glow Plug Control Module
•Engine Coolant Temperature sensor
•Barometric pressure sensor
•Environmental temperature sensor
The powertrain and glow plug control
modules electronically control the glow
plug system. After you switch the ignition
on the glow plug control module
immediately energizes the glow plugs. The
glow plug control module using the engine
coolant temperature, barometric pressure
sensor and environmental temperature
sensor will determine how long the glow
plugs stay energized. The required time for
the glow plugs to be energized decreases
as the coolant temperature, barometric
pressure and environmental temperature
increase.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds.
If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
the engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the engine has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Cold Weather Starting
WARNING: Do not use starting fluid,
for example ether, in the air intake system.
Such fluid could cause immediate
explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with
gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could
cause an explosion.
It is recommended that the engine block
heater be used for starting when the
temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See
Engine Block Heater (page 178).
When operating in cold weather,
Motorcraft® cetane improvers or
non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from
a reputable manufacturer may be used as
needed.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10
seconds as starter damage may occur. If
the engine fails to start, switch the ignition
off and wait 30 seconds before trying
again.
175
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Switch the ignition on. Do not
start the engine until the
glow-plug indicator turns off.
When the glow plug pre-heat indicator
turns off, turn the key to start and release
the key as soon as the engine starts. After
starting the engine, the glow plugs may
remain on for a period. If you do not start
the engine before the glow plug activation
time ends, you will need to reset the glow
plugs by switching the ignition off. After
the engine starts, allow it to idle for about
15 seconds. This is to protect the engine.
Do not increase engine speed until the oil
pressure gauge indicates normal pressure.
For vehicles with keyless start:
1. Fully depress brake pedal and hold to
allow time for glow-plugs to heat.
2. Press and release the start button.
Note: A message "Engine Start Pending,
Please Wait", along with the glow plug
indicator displays on the instrument cluster.
3. When the engine starts, release the
brake pedal.
Cold Weather Operation
Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat
the engine to its normal operating
temperature. Long periods of idling,
especially in cold weather, can cause a
buildup of deposits which can cause engine
damage.
Changing to a lighter grade engine oil also
makes starting easier under these
conditions. Refer to Engine oil
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 423).
Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
temperatures. Diesel fuel which has not
been properly formulated for the ambient
conditions may gel which can clog the fuel
filters. One indication that the fuel filter(s)
may be clogged is if the engine starts, stalls
after a short time, and then does not
restart. If you have been using biodiesel,
you may need to use a fuel with lower
biodiesel content, try another brand, or
discontinue using biodiesel. Do not use
alcohol based additives to correct fuel
gelling. This may result in damage to the
fuel injectors and system. Use the proper
anti-gel and performance improvement
product. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 423).
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel and
water separator that recirculates fuel from
the engine to help prevent fuel filter
clogging. To avoid engine fuel starvation
during cold weather operation of 32°F
(0°C) or below, we recommended that
the fuel level in your tank should not drop
below 1⁄4 full. This helps prevent air from
entering the fuel system and stalling the
engine.
In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the
engine may slowly increase to a higher idle
speed if left idling in park (P). As the engine
warms-up, the engine sound level
decreases due to the activation of
PCM-controlled sound reduction features.
If you operate your vehicle in a heavy
snowstorm or blowing snow conditions,
snow and ice can clog the engine air
induction. If this occurs, the engine may
experience a significant reduction in power
output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and/or ice away from inside
the air filter assembly. Remove the air
cleaner cover and the pleated paper filter,
leaving the foam filter in and remove any
snow or ice. Make sure you install the foam
filter correctly in place. Remove any debris,
snow or ice on the foam filter by brushing
the surface with soft brush. Once you have
cleared all of the debris, reinstall the air
filter and assembly.
Do not use water, solvents, or a hard brush
for cleaning the foam filter.
176
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
In order to operate the engine in
temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower, read
the following instructions:
•Make sure that the batteries are of
sufficient size and are fully charged.
Check other electrical components to
make sure they are in optimum
condition.
•Use the proper coolant solution at the
concentration recommended
protecting the engine against damage
from freezing.
•Try to keep the fuel tank full as much
as possible at the end of operation to
prevent condensation in the fuel
system.
•Make sure you use proper cold weather
engine oil and that it is at its proper
level. Also, if necessary, make sure to
follow the engine oil and filter change
schedule found under the Special
operating conditions section listed in
the scheduled maintenance
information.
•At temperatures of -9°F (-23°C) or
below, it is recommended that you use
an engine block heater to improve cold
engine starting.
•If operating in arctic temperatures of
-20°F (-29°C) or lower, consult your
truck dealer for information about
special cold weather equipment and
precautions.
The following cold weather idling
guidelines are recommended:
•You can use Motorcraft® cetane
improvers or non-alcohol-based
cetane improvers from a reputable
manufacturer as needed.
•Maintain the engine cooling system
properly.
•Avoid shutting the engine down after
an extensive idling period. Drive your
vehicle for several miles with the
engine at normal operating
temperatures under a moderate load.
•Consider using an engine block heater.
•For extended idle times use an
approved idle speed increase device.
Winter Operating Tips for Arctic
Operation -20°F (-29°C) and Below
The following information is a guideline
only and is not to be the only source of
possible solutions in resolving extreme
cold temperature issues.
Starting Aids
WARNING: Do not use starting fluid,
for example ether, in the air intake system.
Such fluid could cause immediate
explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.
The use of the factory engine block heater
assists in engine starting in extreme cold
ambient temperatures See Engine Block
Heater (page 178).
177
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Idle Control
Your vehicle may have a factory option for
a stationary elevated idle control through
dash-mounted upfitter switches that
allows the operator to elevate the idle rpm
for extended idle periods, as well as
aftermarket equipment such as PTO
operation. You must configure this feature
even if ordered from the factory. See your
authorized dealer for required upfitting.
Operation in Snow and Rain
Vehicle operation in heavy snowfall or
extreme rain conditions may feed
excessive amounts of snow or water into
the air intake system. This could plug the
air filter with snow and may cause the
engine to lose power and possibly shut
down.
We recommend the following actions after
operating your vehicle up to 200 mi
(320 km) in snowfall or extreme rain:
•Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear all the snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet (do not
remove the foam filter) and reset the
air filter restriction gauge.
Note: Removal of the foam filter degrades
your vehicle performance during snow and
hot weather conditions.
•Extreme rain: The air filter dries after
about 15–30 minutes at highway
speeds. At the earliest opportunity,
open the hood and reset the air filter
restriction gauge.
Refer to Air filter and restriction gauge in
the Maintenance chapter for more
information. See Changing the Engine
Air Filter (page 369).
Operation in Standing Water
Ingestion of water into the diesel engine
can result in immediate and severe
damage to the engine. If driving through
water, slow down to avoid splashing water
into the intake. If the engine stalls, and you
suspect ingestion of water into the engine,
do not try to restart the engine. Consult
your dealer for service immediately.
Your fuel tank vents to the atmosphere by
valves on top of the tank and through the
fuel cap. If water reaches the top of the
tank, the valves may pull water into the
fuel tank. Water in the fuel can cause
performance issues and damage the fuel
injection system.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
Allow the engine to idle for three to five
minutes before shutting it down. The larger
the engine, the greater the need is for this
idling period.
Note: Try to limit engine idle to 10 minutes.
Excessive idling reduces fuel economy.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
178
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block heater.
This could damage the power cable and
may cause an electrical short resulting in
fire, injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
•Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
179
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped)
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically stopping and restarting
the engine when your vehicle has stopped.
The engine restarts automatically when
you release the brake pedal.
In some situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
•To maintain interior comfort.
•To recharge the battery.
Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable,
Auto-Start-Stop will be inhibited for a short
time after a refuel event while the system
is verifying the fuel type being used.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into park
(P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: Before opening the hood
or performing any maintenance, fully apply
the parking brake, shift into park (P) or
neutral (N) and switch the ignition off.
WARNING: Always switch the
ignition off before leaving the vehicle. If the
ignition is switched on an automatic restart
may occur at any time.
WARNING: The system may require
the engine to automatically restart when
the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green or flashes amber. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
112).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system automatically enables every
time you start your vehicle if:
•You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop
button (not illuminated).
•Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you have
initially started your vehicle.
•You have stopped your vehicle.
•Your foot is on the brake pedal.
•The driver door is closed.
•There is adequate brake vacuum.
•The interior compartment has cooled
or warmed to an acceptable level.
•The front windshield defroster is off.
•You have not turned the steering wheel
rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp
angle.
•The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
•The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
•The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
•Elevation is below about 11,000 ft
(3,350 m).
•Ambient temperature is moderate.
•The trailer is not connected.
•If you select Normal, Eco, Snow/Wet
or Grass/Gravel/Snow modes. (if
equipped).
•You are not in 4H or 4L.
•You have not selected Manual shift
mode.
180
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
•Trail control is not active.
•You have not selected Tow haul, Sport,
Sand, Mud/Rut or Baja modes. (if
equipped).
Note: Note when in Sport mode it can be
enabled by pressing the Auto-Start-Stop
button.
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light,
it illuminates when automatic engine stop
is not available due to one of the above
noted conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•You have removed your foot from the
brake pedal.
•You press the accelerator pedal.
•You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
•The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
•Your vehicle is moving.
•The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
•Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
•The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
•You have exceeded the maximum
engine off time.
•When you press the Auto-Start-Stop
button with the engine automatically
stopped.
•The front defroster is turned to the Max
setting.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•You have increased the blower fan
speed or changed the climate control
temperature.
•You have an electrical accessory
turned on or plugged in.
Note: You may notice that the climate seat
fan fluctuates during an automatic restart.
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
E181352
Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. Deactivating
using the button lasts only 1 key cycle.
Press the button again to restore
Auto-Start-Stop function.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. You must
restart the vehicle manually. See
Information Displays (page 112).
181
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
If your vehicle is in an engine off
Auto-Start-Stop, shifting from drive (D) to
reverse (R) will not cause a restart if you
do not have the brake pedal pressed. The
message Auto-Start-Stop Press Brake to
Start Engine will appear. You must press
the brake pedal within 60 seconds or a
shift to park (P) and a manual restart will
be required.
182
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
•Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
•Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S.
Virgin Islands And Other Locales)
Note: Your warranty will not cover damage
caused by using an improper type of fuel or
fuel additive.
183
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Do not blend used engine oil with
diesel fuel under any circumstances.
Blending used oil with the fuel will
significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust
emissions and reduce engine life due to
increased internal wear.
You should use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel
fuel (also known as ULSD) designated as
number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of
15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You
may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels
containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20. These fuels should meet
the ASTM D975 diesel or the ASTM D7467
B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications.
Outside of North America, use fuels
meeting EN590 or equivalent local market
standard.
Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16-500 ppm) or high sulfur
diesel fuel (greater than 500
ppm) in your diesel engine will cause
certain emission components to
malfunction which may also cause the
service engine soon light to illuminate
indicating an emissions-related concern.
Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold
temperature. For best results at
temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), it is
recommended to use a diesel fuel which
has been seasonally adjusted for the
ambient conditions.
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The
Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated
Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
Is Not Required
For the engine to operate reliably on
low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the
engine must be a factory built high-sulfur
engine (available as a dealer order option
for select markets) or an ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel configured engine that has been
retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using
Ford Motor Company dealer service parts.
Failure to use retrofit components other
than those available through your
authorized dealer will result in coolant
system damage, engine overheating,
selective catalyst reduction system or
diesel particulate filter damage and
possible base engine damage.
Use only a diesel engine configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with
diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater
than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel
(16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel
(greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine
designed to use only Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel fuel may result in damage to engine
emission control devices and the
aftertreatment system, potentially
rendering the vehicle inoperable.
Vehicles with engines configured for use
with high sulfur diesel fuel are only
available for sale in countries where ultra
low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not
available or mandated by the government.
Vehicles originally sold in a ultra low sulfur
diesel fuel market that are subsequently
exported to non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel
markets will need to be retrofitted (at the
customer’s expense using Ford authorized
dealer service parts) in order to be reliably
operated on non- ultra low sulfur diesel
fuel.
Biodiesel
WARNING: Do not mix diesel with
gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could
cause an explosion.
184
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Do not use home heating oil,
agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste
cooking greases, biodiesel greater than 20%
or any diesel not intended for highway use.
Damage to the fuel injection system, engine
and exhaust catalyst, and diesel particulate
filter can occur if you use an improper fuel.
Red dye is used to identify fuels intended
for agricultural and non-highway use.
You may operate your vehicle on diesel
fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also
known as B20.
Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted
product from renewable fuel sources, such
as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste
cooking greases.
To help achieve acceptable engine
performance and durability when using
biodiesel in your vehicle:
•Confirm the biodiesel content of the
fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less
•Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality
that complies with industry standards
•Follow the recommended service
maintenance intervals. See General
Maintenance Information (page 560).
•Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel
tank for more than 1 month
•Consider changing brands or reducing
biodiesel content if you have cold
temperature fuel gelling issues or a
frequent LOW FUEL PRESSURE
message appearing
Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater
than 20% may cause damage to your
vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust
after-treatment hardware (exhaust
catalyst and particulate filter) failures.
Concentrations greater than 20% can also
cause fuel filter restrictions that may result
in a lack of power or damage to fuel
system components, including fuel pump
and fuel injector failures.
SAE 5W-40 oil is recommended for fuels
with greater than 5% biodiesel (B5). For
more information about oil change
intervals and other maintenance when
operating on biodiesel See Special
Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance (page 566).
Look for a label on the fuel pump to
confirm the amount of biodiesel contained
in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel content is often
indicated with the letter B followed by the
percent of biodiesel in the fuel. For
example, B20 indicates a fuel containing
20% biodiesel. Ask the service station
attendant to confirm the biodiesel content
of a diesel fuel if you do not see a label on
the fuel pump.
Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than
diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and
should not be stored in the fuel tank for
more than 1 month. If you plan to park or
store your vehicle for more than 1 month,
then you should empty your vehicle fuel
tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the
tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel
fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of
30 minutes.
Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can
damage fuel system seals and plastics and
corrode steel parts.
During cold weather, if you have problems
operating on biodiesel, you may need to
use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel
content, try another brand, or discontinue
the use of biodiesel.
Diesel Fuel Additives
It should not be necessary to add any
aftermarket additives to your fuel if you
use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms
to ASTM industry specifications.
Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel
injector system or engine.
185
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an
equivalent cetane booster additive if you
suspect fuel has low cetane. Use
Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance
improver or an equivalent additive if there
is fuel gelling.
Do not use alcohol-based additives to
improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel
gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol
additives may result in damage to the fuel
injectors and system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 427).
Your warranty may not cover repairs
needed to correct the effects of using an
aftermarket product that does not meet
Ford specifications in your fuel.
FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
identifiers:
•Yellow fuel filler cap.
•Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
•Yellow fuel filler housing.
•Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
door.
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 279).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
•Diesel fuel.
•Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
•Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
186
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline
We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 279).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
•Diesel fuel.
•Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
•Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
187
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION - REGULAR CAB
The fuel filler funnel is behind the
right-hand front seat.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION - SUPERCAB/
SUPERCREW
The fuel filler funnel is under the second
row right-hand rear seat.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
•Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
•You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
•Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
•Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
•Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or
push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
188
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 188).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
189
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206911
A B
C D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
D
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the
fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
190
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E139202
A
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E206912
A B
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
191
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
188). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 112).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
•Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
•Fully loading your vehicle.
•Carrying unnecessary weight.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
•Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 183).
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
•Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
•You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
192
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
•Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
•Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
•The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
•Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
•Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
•A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
•A plugged engine air filter element.
•Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
•A clogged fuel filter.
•Contaminated fuel.
•Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
•An open or pinched sensor hose.
•Incorrect engine oil level.
193
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
•Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
•Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
•Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
•Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
•Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 322).
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
194
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 189).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
195
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC
REDUCTANT SYSTEM
Your vehicle may have a selective catalytic
reduction system. The system helps reduce
emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from
the exhaust system. The system
automatically injects diesel exhaust fluid
into the exhaust system to enable correct
selective catalytic reduction system
function.
Note: Selective catalytic reduction systems
are not fitted to vehicles in markets where
only high-sulfur diesel fuel is available.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level
In order for the system to operate correctly
you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid
level.
A warning message appears in the
information display when the diesel
exhaust fluid level is low. If a warning
message appears, refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank as soon as possible. See
Information Messages (page 124).
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Tank
WARNING: Keep diesel exhaust fluid
out of reach of children. Avoid contact with
skin, eyes or clothing. In case of contact
with your eyes, flush immediately with
water and get prompt medical attention.
In case of contact with your skin, clean
immediately with soap and water. If you
swallow any diesel exhaust fluid, drink
plenty of water, call a physician
immediately.
196
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
WARNING: Only refill the diesel
exhaust fluid tank in a well ventilated area.
When you remove the diesel exhaust fluid
tank filler cap or a diesel exhaust fluid
container cap, ammonia vapors may
escape. Ammonia vapors can be irritating
to skin, eyes and mucous membranes.
Inhaling ammonia vapors can cause
burning to the eyes, throat and nose and
cause coughing and watery eyes.
E226045
The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue
filler cap. The tank is behind the left-hand
front wheel. Fill the tank using a fluid pump
at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a
diesel exhaust fluid container. We
recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust
fluid. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 423).
E163354
)
E163354
Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). Non-certified diesel exhaust
fluid use can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
fuel tank. This can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at
an authorized dealer, most highway truck
stops or you can contact roadside
assistance for help in finding a retailer that
sells diesel exhaust fluid. In addition, there
is a government website to help you find
the nearest location to purchase diesel
exhaust fluid:
http://www.discoverdef.com.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Fuel Station Pump
Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using
a nozzle is similar to fuel fill. The nozzle
shuts off automatically when the tank is
full.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Using a Container
The following procedure applies to
Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar
fluid containers. Always follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid
container cap. Place the spout on to
the container and tighten it until you
feel a strong resistance.
197
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank
filler cap.
3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until
the seal on the spout seats on to the
filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank.
When the tank is full the fluid will stop
flowing automatically.
4. Return the container to the vertical
position slightly below the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid
remaining in the spout to drain back in
to the container.
5. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the
diesel exhaust fluid tank cap.
6. Remove the spout from the diesel
exhaust fluid container and replace the
cap.
Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in
the container retain it for later use. The
spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with
clean water prior to storage. Do not use the
diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other
fluid.
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in
Cold Climates
Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the
ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C).
Your vehicle has a preheating system
which allows diesel exhaust fluid to
operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not
use your vehicle for an extended period
when the ambient temperature is below
12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid
freezes it may damage the tank. This is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning
Messages and Vehicle Operations
WARNING: Diesel exhaust fluid must
be refilled when low or replaced when
contaminated or your vehicle speed
becomes limited to 50 mph (80 km/h). In
these conditions, drive with caution and
refill diesel exhaust fluid immediately. If
the diesel exhaust fluid becomes empty
or contaminated and fluid is not replaced,
your vehicle becomes limited to engine idle
only once stopped. In these conditions, be
cautious where you stop your vehicle
because you may not be able to drive long
distances or maintain highway speeds until
you refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid.
WARNING: Tampering with or
disabling the selective catalytic reduction
system results in severe vehicle
performance limitation including eventual
speed limiting to 5 mph (8 km/h).
The information display shows a series of
messages about the amount of diesel
exhaust fluid available. A systems check
displays messages indicating the amount
of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays
a warning message indicating the
approximate distance remaining as the
fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears
empty. See Information Messages
(page 124).
E163176
As the diesel exhaust fluid level
nears empty, the warning
symbol displays and a series of
tones and messages starting at 500 mi
(800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust
fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and
messages continue until you refill the
diesel exhaust fluid tank.
198
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Continued driving without refilling results
in the following actions as required by the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA):
•Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message
appears in the information display.
•Further vehicle operation without
refilling the diesel exhaust fluid tank
causes the engine to enter an idle-only
condition. This only occurs upon vehicle
refueling or at an extended idle. A
message indicates the required actions
to resume normal operation. It is
required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal
(3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the
tank to exit the idle-only condition, but
your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting
mode until you refill the tank
completely.
Note: For either vehicle speed limiting or
idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation
resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust
fluid tank.
Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid
tank from empty, there may be a short delay
before detecting the increased level of fluid.
The increased level detection must occur
before your vehicle returns to full power.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines
and Information
•Use only diesel exhaust fluid that
carries the American Petroleum
Institute (API) certified diesel exhaust
fluid trademark or ISO 22241.
•Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the
diesel fuel tank.
•Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid
tank.
•Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive.
•Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid
container once it is emptied.
•Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on
painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic
components. Immediately wipe away
any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled
with a damp cloth and water. If it has
already crystallized, use warm water
and a sponge.
•Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct
sunlight and in temperatures between
23°F (-5°C) and 68°F (20°C).
•Diesel exhaust fluid freezes below 12°F
(-11°C).
•Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid
bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could
cause damage to interior components
or release an ammonia odor inside your
vehicle.
•Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable,
non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble
liquid.
•The system has a diesel exhaust fluid
quality sensor. Dilution of diesel
exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid
in the SCR system leads to a diesel
exhaust fluid system fault, eventually
leading to the vehicle only operating in
idle-only mode.
•Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with
water or any other liquid.
•An ammonia odor may be smelled
when the cap is removed or during
refill. Refill diesel exhaust fluid in a well
ventilated area.
199
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Typical Diesel Exhaust Fluid Usage
When Using the Power Take Off (PTO)
Continuous PTO use—Minimal PTO use
0–7,800 mi (0–12,550 km)
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust
Fluid or Inoperative Selective
Catalytic Reduction System
Selective catalytic reduction systems are
sensitive to contamination of the diesel
exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the
fluid is important to avoid system
malfunctions. If you remove or drain the
diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the
same fluid to refill the tank. The system
has a sensor to monitor fluid quality.
E163176
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message appears in the
information display if the system
becomes contaminated or inoperative.
Continued driving without replacing diesel
exhaust fluid or having the selective
catalytic reduction system repaired results
in the following actions as required by the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) and
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA):
•Within a preset distance to empty,
speed is limited upon vehicle restart.
Prior to this occurring a message
appears in the information display.
•Further vehicle operation without
replacing contaminated diesel exhaust
fluid causes the engine to enter an
idle-only condition. This only occurs
upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in
park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for
10 minutes or more and is indicated by
a message in the information display
indicating required actions to resume
normal operation.
Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only
condition, normal vehicle operation resumes
when you repair the contaminated system.
To service a contaminated or inoperative
system, see an authorized dealer.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
The filter forms part of the emissions
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
exhaust gas.
Regeneration
WARNING: Do not park or idle your
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The regeneration
process creates very high exhaust gas
temperatures and the exhaust will radiate
a considerable amount of heat during and
after regeneration and after you have
switched the engine off. This is a potential
fire hazard.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration
process.
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
out this process automatically.
200
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
If your journeys meet one of the following
conditions:
•You drive only short distances.
•You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
•Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.
You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
•Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
•Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
•Do not switch the ignition off.
•Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.
Oxidation Catalytic Converter and
Diesel Particulate Filter System (If
Equipped)
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the diesel oxidation
catalytic converter or the diesel particulate
filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic
converter and the diesel particulate filter
heat up to very high temperatures after
only a short period of engine operation and
remain hot after you switch the engine off.
Your vehicle has a diesel particulate filter.
The diesel particulate filter is an inline filter
in the exhaust system that reduces carbon
emissions by trapping exhaust particles
before they reach the tailpipe. The diesel
particulate filter looks similar to a
traditional exhaust catalyst and is part of
the exhaust system under your vehicle. The
filter couples to a diesel oxidation catalyst
that reduces the amount of harmful
exhaust emitted from the tailpipe. As soot
gathers in the system, it begins to restrict
the filter. The system must periodically
clean the soot that gathers inside the filter.
This is carried out in two ways, passive
regeneration and active regeneration. Both
methods occur automatically and require
no actions from the driver. During either
one of these regeneration methods, you
may notice a change in exhaust tone. At
certain times, the information display
shows various messages related to the
diesel particulate filter. See Information
Messages (page 124).
Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance
You must properly maintain your vehicle's
diesel particulate filter in order for it to
function properly.
Do not disregard maintenance messages
that appear in the information display.
Failure to follow the instructions of an
information message may degrade vehicle
performance and could lead to engine
damage that may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Failure to perform active or operator
commanded regeneration when instructed
could result in a clogged diesel particulate
filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills
beyond the regeneration threshold, your
vehicle disables the ability for active and
operator commanded regeneration. This
could result in irreversible damage to the
diesel particulate filter requiring
replacement that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
201
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Passive Regeneration
In passive regeneration, the exhaust
system temperature and constituents
automatically clean the filter by oxidizing
the soot. Cleaning automatically occurs
during normal vehicle operating conditions
due to driving patterns.
Active Regeneration
Once the diesel particulate filter is full of
exhaust particles, the engine control
module commands the exhaust system to
clean the filter through active regeneration.
Active regeneration requires the engine
computer to raise the exhaust temperature
to eliminate the particles. During cleaning,
the particles convert to harmless gasses.
Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter
continues trapping exhaust particles.
The regeneration process operates more
efficiently when you drive your vehicle at
a constant speed above 30 mph
(48 km/h) and at a steady engine speed
for approximately 20 minutes. The
frequency and duration of regeneration
fluctuates by how you drive your vehicle,
outside air temperature and altitude. For
most driving, regeneration frequency varies
from 100–500 mi (160–805 km) between
occurrences and each occurrence lasts
9–35 minutes. You can usually reduce the
duration of regeneration if you maintain a
constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When the engine control module detects
that the diesel particulate filter is nearly
full of particulates and you are not
operating your vehicle in a manner to allow
effective automatic regeneration,
messages appear in the information
display as a reminder for you to drive your
vehicle in order to clean the diesel
particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle
in a manner to allow effective automatic
regeneration, the information display
shows a cleaning exhaust filter message,
which is the normal regeneration process.
You can also choose operator commanded
regeneration to clean the exhaust system
at this point. See Information Messages
(page 124).
If you are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic active
regeneration or you choose to perform
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter
while at idle, then operator commanded
regeneration would need to be performed.
Operator Commanded Regeneration
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, a drive time is less than 10 -
15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully
warm up, passive and active regeneration
may not sufficiently clean the diesel
particulate filter system. Operator
commanded regeneration allows you to
manually start regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter at idle to clean the filter.
If you are not sure whether your vehicle has
this feature, contact an authorized dealer.
When to Carry Out Operator Commanded
Regeneration
You can use the operator commanded
regeneration feature when a message
appears in the information display and you
are not able to drive in a manner that
allows effective automatic active
regeneration or if you choose to manually
start the regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter manually while the vehicle
is idle. See Information Messages (page
124).
202
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Operator Commanded Regeneration
Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position
WARNING: Do not park or idle your
vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The regeneration
process creates very high exhaust gas
temperatures and the exhaust will radiate
a considerable amount of heat during and
after regeneration and after you have
switched the engine off. This is a potential
fire hazard.
WARNING: Stay clear of the exhaust
tailpipe during regeneration. Hot exhaust
gases can burn you badly.
Make sure that the louvers located at the
tip of the exhaust are clear of any
obstructions as they are used to introduce
fresh air into the tailpipe to cool the
exhaust gases as they leave the exhaust
system.
Before you start operator commanded
regeneration, do the following:
•Shift into park (P) and apply the
parking brake, on stable, level ground.
•Park your vehicle outside of any
structure.
•Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m)
away from any obstructions and away
from materials that can easily combust
or melt, for example paper, leaves,
petroleum products, fuels, plastics and
other dry organic material.
•Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8
tank of fuel.
•Make sure all fluids are at proper levels.
How to Start Operator Commanded
Regeneration
WARNING: Stay clear of the exhaust
tailpipe during regeneration. Hot exhaust
gases can burn you badly.
Note: You cannot use the operator
commanded regeneration until the diesel
particulate filter load percentage has
reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter
load percentage fluctuates up and down
when driving your vehicle due to active and
passive regenerations.
Note: During the use of operator
commanded regeneration, you may observe
a light amount of white smoke. This is
normal.
You may not be able to use
operator commanded
regeneration if the service engine
soon warning lamp appears in the
information display
Information Display Procedure
Start with your vehicle engine and when it
has reached the normal operating
temperature, press the information display
control button on the steering wheel. See
Information Display Control (page 86).
If a message advising that the exhaust
filter is full appears in the information
display, press the OK button as instructed.
Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
the next prompts regarding the exhaust
position required to initiate operator
commanded regeneration. Be sure to
understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished.
203
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
If the diesel particulate filter is near or at
saturation, a message requesting
permission to initiate filter cleaning
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 124).
Answer yes to this prompt and then follow
the next prompts regarding exhaust
position required to initiate operator
commanded regeneration. Be sure to
understand each prompt. If you are not
sure what is being asked by each prompt,
contact an authorized dealer. The display
confirms the operation has started and
when it has finished. You can also drive to
clean the filter.
When the system is at the point
of oversaturation, the service
engine warning lamp illuminates
and a message appears in the information
display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning.
You must have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Once operator commanded regeneration
starts, engine speed increases to
approximately 2000 rpm and the cooling
fan speed increases. You will hear a
change in audible sound due to engine
speed and cooling fan speed increases.
It is not necessary to open the hood on the
engine compartment. Once operator
commanded regeneration completes, the
engine speed returns to normal idling. The
exhaust system remains very hot for
several minutes even after regeneration is
complete. Do not reposition the vehicle
over materials that could burn until the
exhaust system has had sufficient time to
cool. Depending on the amount of soot
collected by the diesel particulate filter,
ambient temperature and altitude,
operator commanded regeneration lasts
approximately 30 minutes.
Operator Commanded Regeneration
with Automatic Regeneration Control
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is operated with significant
stationary operation, low speed drive
cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short
drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes
or the vehicle does not fully warm up,
passive and active regeneration may not
sufficiently clean the diesel particulate
filter system. You can switch off automatic
regeneration until better driving conditions
are available, for example steady high
speed driving. You can then switch
automatic regeneration back on to clean
the diesel particulate filter.
Switching Automatic Regeneration
Control On and Off
To switch operator commanded
regeneration on and off, use the
information display control on the steering
wheel. See Information Display Control
(page 86). Scroll to the exhaust cleaning
message, a check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.
How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator
Commanded Regeneration
If you need to cancel the operator
commanded regeneration, pressing the
brake, accelerator or switching the engine
off stops the procedure. Depending on the
amount of time you allowed the operator
commanded regeneration to operate, soot
may not have had sufficient time to be fully
eliminated, but the exhaust system and
exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut
your vehicle off during operator
commanded regeneration, you may notice
turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence
caused by shutting off a diesel engine
during boosted operation and is considered
normal.
204
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Filter Service and Maintenance
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
If filter service is required, the
engine control system warning
lamp illuminates in the
information display.
If there are any issues with the
diesel particulate filter system,
the engine control system
warning lamp and a service
engine soon warning lamp
illuminate to inform you that
your vehicle requires service. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly
Maintenance
Aftermarket devices or modifications to
the exhaust system may reduce the
effectiveness of the exhaust system as
well as cause damage to the exhaust
system or engine. This may also degrade
vehicle performance and could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
205
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tow/haul
when the road surface is slippery. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property damage.
Note: Under certain conditions, you may
not be able to shift out of park (P) unless
the intelligent access key is inside the
vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of your Automatic Transmission
Console shifter
E184456
Column shifter
E249567
Note: You can press the button on the
gearshift lever to cycle through the available
drive modes. See Drive Control (page 268).
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
The instrument cluster displays the current
gear.
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle, which is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
206
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy, and allows
automatic upshifts and downshifts through
all available gears.
Manual (M) with Floor-shifter
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the
driver can change gears up or down as
desired. By moving the gearshift lever from
drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you
now have control of selecting the gear you
desire using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission later in this
section.
To return to normal drive (D) position,
move the gearshift lever back to drive (D).
The transmission operates in all available
gears.
Third (3) with Column-shifter - 6-speed
Transmission operates in third (3) gear
only. Use third (3) gear for improved
traction on slippery roads.
Second (2) - 6-speed
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1) - 6-speed
•Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift
lever.
•Does not downshift into first (1) gear
at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Tow Mode
E161509
To activate tow mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever
until tow mode is selected. The
indicator light illuminates in the instrument
cluster when the system becomes active.
The tow mode feature:
•Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds
to reduce the frequency of
transmission shifting.
•Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
assists you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
•Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount you press the
brake pedal.
The tow mode feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using tow
mode.
To deactivate the tow mode feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever twice. The
indicator light deactivates when the
system turns off. Tow mode also
deactivates when you power down your
vehicle.
Sport Mode
E176099
To activate Sport Mode, press
the button on the gearshift lever
until sport mode is selected. The
SPORT or S indicator light illuminates in
the instrument display when the system
becomes active.
207
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
The sport mode feature:
•Provides additional slope, engine
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This increases
engine RPM during engine braking.
•Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
•Selects gears more quickly and at
higher engine speeds.
To deactivate the sport mode feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever again. The
SPORT or S indicator light deactivates
when the system turns off. The sport mode
feature also deactivates when you power
down your vehicle.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature increases durability and
provides consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is normal and
does not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation.
Forced Downshifts
•Allowed in drive (D) with the tow mode
feature on or off.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
Understanding your SelectShift™
Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as
SelectShift determines that damage to
the engine from over-revving does not
occur.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
Manual (M) with Floor-shifter
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
(M) position allows you to manually select
the gear you desire. Only the current gear
displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift
lever or steering wheel to manually select
gears. Press the + button to upshift or the
– button to downshift. Return the
transmission to a different gearshift
position to deactivate manual control.
208
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
E192285
Progressive Range Selection
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience, for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep slope.
With the transmission in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The available
and selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Press the – button again
to lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Only the available gears display and
the transmission automatically shifts
between the available gears. Press the +
button to unlock gears to allow the
transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission shifts automatically within
the gear range you select.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
apply the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if
appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
until you verify that the stoplamps are
working.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 334).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure allows you to move the gearshift
lever from park (P):
Column-shifter
1. Apply the parking brake and switch off
your vehicle.
209
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boot
hole and pull top half of shroud up and
forward to separate it from the lower
half of the shroud. There is a hinge at
the forward edge of the top shroud.
Roll the top half of the shroud upward
on the hinge point, then pull straight
rearward toward the driver’s seat to
remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
E163186
8. Apply the brake, pull the white disk
then move the shifter to neutral (N).
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as the halves rotate together.
Floor-shifter
1. Apply the parking brake and switch off
your vehicle.
2. Remove the rubber mat between the
shifter and cup holder. Using a
screwdriver or similar tool, carefully pry
up the access panel from the
attachment points and disconnect it
from the console to expose the inside
of the gearshift.
E182464
210
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
3. Locate the white brake shift interlock
lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
E183128
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using light finger
pressure, move the white lever forward
when pulling the gearshift lever out of
the park (P) position and into the
neutral (N) position.
5. Install the access panel and rubber
mat.
6. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle,
and release the parking brake. See your
authorized dealer as soon as possible
if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
211
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (If
Equipped)
Note: For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle, see
General Information in the Wheels and Tires
chapter.
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4H or 4L mode
is only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these
surfaces may produce some noise (such as
occasional clunks), but should not damage
drive components.
Note: If 4L is selected while your vehicle is
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD
system should not perform a shift. This is
normal and should be no reason for concern.
Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low)
for proper operation.
Note: You can switch on and switch off the
electronic locking differential by pulling the
4WD control (4WD vehicles) or turning the
electronic locking differential control (2WD
vehicles). See Electronic Locking
Differential (page 220).
4WD Indicator Lights
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system can typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It should not default to
4X2 in all circumstances. When this warning
is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by
an authorized dealer.
4X2
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
4X4 Auto
E181781
Continuously illuminates when
4A is selected (2-Speed
Automatic 4WD vehicles only).
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.
4X4 LOW
E181780
Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
Using the Electronic Shift on the
Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
E191851
2H (4X2)
For general on-road driving. Sends power
to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.
212
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
4H (4X4 HIGH)
Provides mechanically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels for use in off-road or winter
conditions such as deep snow, sand or
mud. This mode is not for use on dry
pavement.
4L (4X4 LOW)
Provides mechanically locked four-wheel
drive power to both the front and rear
wheels for use on low traction surfaces,
but does so with additional gearing for
increased torque multiplication. Intended
only for off-road applications such as deep
sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy
objects. 4L (4X4 low) should not engage
while your vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h); this is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or
from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays can improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or while applying
the accelerator pedal.
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
You can move the control from 2H or 4H
at a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating
a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
complete the message center can then
display the system mode selected.
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
The information display can display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display can then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not
present, the shift should not occur and the
information display can display
information guiding the driver through the
proper shifting procedures.
If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays in
the information display, a transfer case
gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate
this condition, place the transmission in a
forward gear, move your vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral (N) to allow
the transfer case to complete the range
shift.
Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD
System (If Equipped)
This system includes an electronically
controlled transfer case with a high
capacity clutch. The system is interactive
with the road, continually monitoring and
adjusting power delivery to the front and
rear wheels to optimize traction.
Note: The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the transfer
case clutch in 4A mode and disable it during
driving maneuvers when necessary.
Note: The information display may show
messages during 4WD operation. See
Information Messages (page 124).
213
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
E225302
2H (4X2)
For general on-road driving, this mode
provides optimal smoothness and fuel
economy at high speeds. Sends power to
the rear wheels only.
4A (4X4 AUTO)
Provides electronic controlled four-wheel
drive with power delivered to the front and
rear wheels, as required, for increased
traction. 4A tuning varies based on
selected Drive Mode See Drive Control
(page 268). . 4A in Normal and Sport is
appropriate for all on-road driving
conditions, including, dry road surfaces. 4A
in Snow/Wet is appropriate for slippery
on-road conditions such as snow and ice
covered roads.
4H (4X4 HIGH)
Provides electronically or mechanically
locked four-wheel drive power to both the
front and rear wheels for use in off-road or
winter conditions such as deep snow, sand
or mud. This mode is not for use on dry
pavement.
4L (4X4 LOW)
Provides electronically or mechanically
locked four-wheel drive power to both the
front and rear wheels for use on low
traction surfaces, but does so with
additional gearing for increased torque
multiplication. Intended only for off-road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4X4
low) should not engage while your vehicle
is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L
(4X4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays can improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping or while applying
the accelerator pedal.
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
You can move the control from 2H to 4A
or 4H at a stop or while driving. The
information display may display a message
indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once
the shift is complete the message center
can then display the system mode
selected.
Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: You may hear some noise as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
214
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
The information display can display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display can then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not
present, the shift should not occur and the
information display can display
information guiding the driver through the
proper shifting procedures.
If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays in
the information display, a transfer case
gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate
this condition, place the transmission in a
forward gear, move your vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the
transmission back to neutral (N) to allow
the transfer case to complete the range
shift.
Operating 4WD vehicles with spare or
mismatched tires
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of
the spare tire can affect the 4X4 system.
If there is a significant difference between
the size of the spare tire and the remaining
tires, you may have limited four-wheel
drive functionality.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a 4WD
mode turned on.
•Turn on a 4WD mode unless the
vehicle is stationary.
•Use a 4WD mode on dry pavement.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, 4WD
functionality may be limited, especially
when driving in a mechanically locked 4WD
mode. You may experience the following:
•Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
•Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked 4WD mode.
Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly may lead to impairment of the
following:
•Comfort and noise.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet driving capability.
•Four-wheel drive capability.
How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
215
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
your vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may have a front air
dam. Due to low ground clearance, you can
damage it when taking your vehicle off-road.
You can take the air dam off by removing
the bolts that secure it.
Note: Your vehicle may have an underbody
transmission shield and brackets. Due to
low ground clearance, you can damage
them when taking your vehicle off-road.
Remove the shield by disengaging the
fasteners at each corner of the shield. Then,
remove the shield's rear brackets by
removing the bracket to frame bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.
The transfer case supplies power to all four
wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the
transfer case allows you to select different
4WD modes when necessary. You can find
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures in this chapter. You can
find information on transfer case
maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar
with this information before you operate
your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power your
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
•Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4H or
4L modes are only for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed decreases, ease
your vehicle back onto the road. Do not
turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
216
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there can be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
can maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, try the brakes. Wet
brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves
by applying light pressure to the brake
pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
217
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should try to drive
straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you can use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power can cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire chains
or cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
218
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it cannot stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 222).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Parking
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into park
(P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
the transfer case is in the neutral (N)
position, the engine and transmission
disconnect from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, your vehicle is free to roll even
if it is parked. Do not leave your vehicle
unattended with the transfer case in the
neutral (N) position. Set the parking brake
fully and turn off the ignition when leaving
your vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(such as ladders or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
219
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped)
Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
The electronic locking differential is a
device housed in the rear axle that allows
both rear wheels to turn at the same
speed. The electronic locking differential
can provide additional traction should your
vehicle become stuck. You can activate
the differential electronically and shift it
on the fly within the differential operating
speed range. The differential is for use in
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where you need maximum traction. It is
not for use on dry pavement.
The following conditions will affect the
electronic locking differential:
•The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2, 4x4
Auto, or 4x4 High modes.
•The electronic locking differential will
not engage if your vehicle speed is
above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4
Low.
•The electronic locking differential may
not engage if you press your
accelerator pedal during an
engagement attempt. A message may
display in the instrument display
guiding you to release the accelerator
pedal.
•In 4x2, 4x4 Auto, and 4x4 High modes,
the electronic locking differential will
automatically disengage at speeds
above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will
automatically reengage at speeds
below 20 mph (32 km/h).
•In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking
differential will automatically
disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically
reengage at speeds below 56 mph
(90 km/h).
•The AdvanceTrac system has the
ability to take over control of the
electronic locking differential and
disable it during driving maneuvers
when necessary.
When you switch the system on, if you do
not meet the required conditions for
electronic locking differential activation,
the instrument cluster will display the
appropriate information guiding you
through the proper activation process.
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential
Note: Do not use electronic locking
differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Doing so will produce excessive noise,
vibration and increase tire wear.
Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
For 4WD vehicles
E227398
Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.
220
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Rear Axle
For 2WD vehicles
E183740
Turn the control to ON.
E163170
Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the
indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:
•The vehicle speed is too high.
•The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
•The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by a message in the
information display. See your
authorized Ford dealer for assistance.
•The vehicle is experiencing an anti-lock
brake activation.
Operating ELD With a Spare or
Mismatched Tires
On vehicles with an ELD, the size of the
spare tire can affect performance of the
system. If there is a significant difference
between the two rear tires, you may have
limited ELD functionality. If the electronic
locking differential has difficulty
disengaging, release the accelerator pedal
and turn the steering wheel in the opposite
direction when rolling. We recommend
engaging and disengaging the ELD at a
stop when you mount a spare on the rear
axle.
221
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 378).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 107).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement.If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake
system serviced immediately.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
•You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
•Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
222
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
•You take corners too fast.
•The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle
battery is running out of charge.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
You operate it with a switch instead of a
lever. The switch is on the center console
or to the left-hand side of the steering
wheel, on the lower part of the instrument
panel.
Note: The electric parking brake makes
noises during operation. This is normal.
Applying the Electric Parking
Brake
E267156
Pull the switch upward.
E270480
The red warning lamp flashes
during operation and illuminates
when the parking brake is
applied.
Note: It remains illuminated for a short
period of time after you switch the ignition
off.
If it continues to flash or does not
illuminate, the system has malfunctioned.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
automatically apply when you shift into park
(P). See Transmission (page 206).
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in
an Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking
brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the
electric parking brake to slow or stop your
vehicle, you could cause damage to the
brake system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
E270480
The red warning lamp
illuminates, a tone sounds and
the stoplamps turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to
slow your vehicle down unless you release
the switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
223
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
E267156
Push the switch downward.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold
it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until engine
has developed sufficient torque to prevent
your vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull
away in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the
Electric Parking Brake
Close the driver door.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal and pull away
in a normal manner.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the
electric parking brake has not released.
Manually release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake if the Vehicle Battery is
Running Out of Charge
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery is running out of
charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle
(page 322).
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn off
if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
224
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill.Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
225
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and traction
control light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure you
did not manually disable the traction
control system using the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
E166706
The switch for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, a
message and an illuminated icon appear
on the instrument cluster.
Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See Principle of
Operation (page 62).
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes:
•When a driving condition activates
either of the systems.
•If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on:
•When you switch the traction control
system off.
•When you select an alternative stability
control mode.
226
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It's always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator's ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If the stability control or traction control
system detects a fault, the following may
occur:
•The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
•The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
If the stability control or traction control
system activates, the following may occur:
•The stability and traction control light
flashes.
•Your vehicle slows down.
•Reduced engine power.
•A vibration in the brake pedal.
•The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
•If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake pedal, the
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control
The system helps to prevent your vehicle
skidding or laterally sliding by individually
applying the brakes to one or more wheels
and, if necessary, reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system helps to prevent rollovers by
detecting your vehicle's roll motion, and
individually applying the brakes to one or
more wheels.
227
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Stability Control
Side-Wind Stabilization
The system applies the brakes on one side
of your vehicle to reduce the effect of a
sudden side-wind gust on your vehicle's
path. When the system turns on, the
stability and traction control light flashes,
and a message may appear in the
information display. You may notice a
slight deceleration and may still need to
make a steering correction to maintain the
intended vehicle path. The system does
not turn on for a continuous side-wind or
during turns.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle's ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 226).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You can switch the electronic stability
control systems off.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), the systems are disabled.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 226).
228
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Stability Control
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Traction
control system
Electronic
stability
control
Roll stability
control
Stability
control OFF
light
Button func-
tions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at start-
up
DisabledEnabledEnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
momentarily
DisabledDisabledEnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds
Enabled with
higher threshold
target
Enabled with
higher threshold
target
EnabledIlluminatedDouble press *
Sport Mode
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed
again after
deactivation
DisabledDisabledDisabledIlluminatedTransfer case
switched to
4WD Low
*On F-150 Raptor models, the double press function to put your vehicle into sport mode
is not available. You can access sport mode through the terrain management system.
229
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as ice
or extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.
WARNING: Hill descent control does
not provide hill hold at zero miles per hour
(0 kilometers per hour). When stopped,
you must apply the parking brake or place
the vehicle in P (Park), or it may roll away.
Hill descent control allows you to set and
maintain vehicle speed while descending
steep grades in various surface conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20
mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but you cannot use the system to
set or maintain the descent speed.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system provides a
warning in the message center and a tone
sounds when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.
USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
Press and release the hill
descent button on the
instrument panel. A light in the
cluster illuminates and a tone sounds
when you switch this on.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the speed
you desire. To decrease descent speed,
press the brake pedal until you reach the
speed you desire.
When accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the descent speed you desire,
remove your feet from the pedals and the
hill descent control maintains the vehicle
speed you chose.
Note: You may observe a noise from the
ABS pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and is no reason for concern.
Note: Refer to the Raptor Supplement for
further information on Trail Control.
Hill descent modes
•At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h)
and 20 mph (32 km/h): When you
press this button, the light flashes
indicating this feature is active. Your
vehicle maintains the speed you desire
when in this mode.
•At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 40 mph (64 km/h): When you
press this button, the light is solid and
a message appears in the information
display indicating this feature is active.
Your vehicle does not maintain the
speed you desire and you cannot set
your descent speed.
230
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
•At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h):
When you press this button, the system
turns this feature off and no light or
message appears in the information
display. You need to switch this feature
back on to use.
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional hill descent control messages.
See Information Messages (page 124).
231
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false beeps. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on devices
to prevent the false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See
Principle of Operation (page 62).
Note: When a trailer is connected to the
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide warnings. It is
suggested that you disable the system when
a trailer is connected to the vehicle to
prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume reduces to a predetermined
level. After the warning goes away, the
radio volume returns to the previous level.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 112).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and you cannot switch the system
on through the pop-up message. See
Information Messages (page 124).
REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
232
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
E231381
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
•Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the display screen. See
Rear View Camera (page 237).
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment. You
are still responsible to drive with due care
and attention.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
WARNING: Active park assist does
not apply the brakes under any
circumstances.
Note: The blind spot information system
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during an active park assist
maneuver.
Note: Active park assist is a multi-step
process and may require you to shift your
transmission multiple times. Follow the
on-screen instructions until you complete
the parking process.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
your vehicle (hands-free) while you control
the accelerator, transmission and brakes.
The system visually and audibly guides you
to park your vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel or pushing the active park
assist button.
233
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
The system may not operate correctly in
any of the following conditions:
•You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
•One or more tires are improperly
inflated.
•You try to park on a tight curve.
•Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
•The edge of the neighboring parking
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
•The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow or
fog.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
fascia, free from now, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the systems accuracy. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference. For
example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air
brakes or horns.
Note: Following a change in tire size, the
system must recalibrate and operation may
be impaired for a short time.
Do not use the system if:
•You have attached a bike rack, trailer
or other object near the sensors on the
front or rear of your vehicle.
•You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
•A foreign object damages or obstructs
the sensors.
•The correct tire size is not in use. For
example, when using a mini-spare tire.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button to turn the
system on or off.
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left hand side or
right hand side of your vehicle. If the
direction indicator is not used, the system
defaults to the passenger side of your
vehicle.
E130107
234
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
When the system finds a suitable space it
displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the display screen. If your
vehicle is moving very slowly, you may
need to pull forward a short distance
before the system is ready to park.
Note: You can also activate the system
after you drive partially or completely pass
the parking space. To do so, press the active
park assist button and the system informs
you if you recently passed a suitable parking
space.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last detected space.
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the display screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted, for
example driver input is detected, the system
switches off and you need to take full
control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the
steering wheel and nothing obstructing its
movement, your vehicle steers itself into
the space. The system displays instructions
to move your vehicle back and forth in the
space.
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid
(accompanied by a touchscreen display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a chime
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
235
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
•Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
•Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
•Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
•Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
•Switching off the traction control
system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
•Traction control has activated.
•There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered. For example, with snow, ice or dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
You may have recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect,
the vehicle must be driven on a straight road for a short period of time.
236
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission. For example, rolling
forward when the transmission is in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size or of a different size.
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly. For example, when driving from
a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Reverse your vehicle as
slow as possible, higher speeds may limit
your reaction time to stop your vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position
and the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
door is ajar. Some vehicles may not come
equipped with guidelines.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
237
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
E184050
The rear view camera is located on the
tailgate.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
•Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle while reversing.
•Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
•Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once you engage the trailer tow connector.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Pro
Trailer Backup Assist you can set-up the
trailer to work with the Rear View Camera
system. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page
281).
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
•Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
•The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera System Settings
You can access the rear view camera
system settings in the display screen. See
General Information (page 112).
Camera guidelines
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
active or fixed guidelines are on.
238
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines only show with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If the steering
wheel position changes while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not show
when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
E190459
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
239
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol on the camera screen to change
the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until your vehicle speed reaches
6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when the
rear camera delay feature is on, or until a
radio button is pressed.
360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNING: The 360 degree camera
system still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of the
windows, and checking the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.
The 360 degree camera system consists
of front, side and rear cameras. The
system:
•Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
•Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
•Allows you to see a top-down view of
the area outside your vehicle, including
the blind spots.
•Provides visibility around your vehicle
to you in parking maneuvers such as:
•Centering in a parking space.
•Obstacles near vehicle.
•Parallel parking.
E183663
The 360 degree camera system
button is located on the
instrument panel and allows you
to toggle through different camera views.
The front and rear cameras have multiple
screens which consist of: Normal view with
360, Normal view, and split view. When in
park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the
front images will be displayed when the
button is pressed. When in reverse (R), only
the rear images will be displayed when the
button is pressed.
Note: The 360 degree camera system will
turn OFF when your vehicle is in motion at
low speed, except when in reverse (R).
240
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
Camera Views
The small vehicle icon displayed on the
top left corner of the image illustrates the
camera view being displayed. Camera
views are laid out in the order the screens
will appear once the button is pressed.
Note: The front video image will be
disabled when your vehicle is in motion at
low speed, except when in reverse (R).
•Front 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal front camera view next to a
360 degree camera view. This view will
appear on the screen when the button
is pressed in any gear other than
reverse (R).
•Front Normal View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front of your
vehicle. Access this view by pressing
the camera button from the Front 360
+ Normal View screen.
•Front Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is in front of
your vehicle. Access this view by
pressing the camera button from the
Front Normal View screen.
•Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the
normal rear camera view next to a 360
degree camera view. This view can be
accessed by putting your vehicle in
reverse (R), or by pressing the camera
button from the Rear Split View screen.
•Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
Access this view by pressing the
camera button from the Rear 360 +
Normal screen.
•Rear Split View: Provides an
extended view of what is behind your
vehicle. Access this view by pressing
the camera button from the Rear
Normal View screen.
Keep Out Zone
E184448
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.
Front Camera
WARNING: The front camera system
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
E184044
The front video camera, located in the
grille, provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance
to the driver while driving forward at low
speeds.
241
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
To use the front video camera system,
place the transmission in any gear except
reverse (R) and press the small icon in the
corner of the screen.
Note: The front camera system will
automatically switch on when you are in
mud/sand, rock crawl, or Baja mode and
your speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(F150 Raptor only).
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation and
road conditions.
Side Camera
E206263
The side view camera, located in the
outside mirror, provide a video image of
the area on the sides of your vehicle as part
of the front 360 + normal view and rear
360 + normal view. It aids you while
parking your vehicle either forward or
backwards.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
242
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could increase
above the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving
uphill.
E191329
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
information display.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
•Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
243
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: Always pay close
attention to changing road conditions
when using adaptive cruise control. The
system does not replace attentive driving.
Failing to pay attention to the road may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive
cruise control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections or
roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has aftermarket
electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
may not detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect pedestrians or objects in
the road.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
is not a crash warning or avoidance system.
WARNING: Do not use adaptive
cruise control with a snow plow blade
installed.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
E248613
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press ON.
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
244
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
E183738
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET-.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E183738
5. A vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
When Your Vehicle is Stationary
1. Follow a vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Keep the brake pedal fully pressed.
3. Press RES+.
4. The set speed adjusts to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
5. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle, your vehicle does not always
decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash
without driver intervention. Always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failing to do
so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
only warns of vehicles detected by the
radar sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
245
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
•The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
•The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
•You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
less than three seconds, your vehicle
accelerates from a stationary position to
follow the vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a
complete stop and remains stationary for
more than three seconds, press RES+ or
the accelerator pedal to follow the vehicle
ahead.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: When you select Tow/Haul mode,
the gap distance increases slightly.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
E248779
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
E183738
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
246
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
behavior
Distance GapGraphic
display,
bars indic-
ated
between
vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator pedal,
it does not automatically apply the brakes
to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
•Press RES+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
RES+ or SET-.
•Press and hold RES+ or SET- to
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when
you reach the desired speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press RES+. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Automatic Cancellation
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
•The tires lose traction.
•You apply the parking brake.
Park Brake Application
Automatic parking brake application and
cancellation occurs if:
•You unbuckle the seatbelt after you
stop the vehicle.
•You hold the vehicle at a stop
continuously for more than three
minutes.
247
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Note: When towing with adaptive cruise
control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode.
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
248
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary. If something
hits the front end of your vehicle or damage
occurs, the radar-sensing zone may
change. This could cause missed or false
vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a
clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
•The camera is blocked.
•There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
•There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available
The system may not turn on if there is:
•A blocked sensor.
•High brake temperature.
•A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E249424
Note: You cannot see the radar sensor. It
is behind a fascia panel.
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
249
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
ActionCause
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
impact.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that it is
free from obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean, but the message remains in the
display.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
250
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment. You
are still responsible to drive with due care
and attention.
WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system
to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you even
if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle, unless
a MyKey™ is detected.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
selecting Settings then Driver Assist then
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
the system will monitor your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
251
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
will only appear for a short time. If the
system detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning may be issued
which will remain in the information display
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering
wheel control to clear the warning. When
active the system will run automatically in
the background and only issue a warning
if required.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•Switching the ignition off and on.
•Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on your
vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or touch
on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
252
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
E249505
When you switch the system on and the
system detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur, the system
notifies or assists you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and
information display. Depending on the
feature operation mode you select, the
system provides a warning by vibrating the
steering wheel or a steering assistance by
gently counter steering your vehicle back
into the lane.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a
MyKey™ is detected. If the system detects
a MyKey™, it defaults to on and the mode
is set to alert.
Note: If a MyKey™ is detected, pressing
the button does not affect the on or off
status of the system. You can only change
the mode and intensity settings.
E173233
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional menu settings
available. See General Information
(page 112). The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch on the system.
Adjust the settings to enable one of the
three modes:
Alert Only
E165515
Alert Only mode provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane
departure is detected.
Aid Only
E165516
Aid Only mode provides a steering
assistance toward the lane center.
253
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Alert + Aid Mode
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + aid mode provides a steering
assistance toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane, the system provides a steering wheel
vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
•Low
•Medium
•High
System Display
E144813
If you switch the system on in
alert mode, an overhead graphic
of a vehicle with lane markings
appears in the information display.
E173234
If you switch the system on in aid
or alert and aid mode, arrows
appear with lane markings.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still be displayed if adaptive cruise control
is enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:
•Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
•The direction indicator is active.
•Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
•Quick braking.
•Fast acceleration.
•The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
•The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
254
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
255
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot
information system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system
is not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
E255695
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone.
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
•You start your vehicle.
•You shift into drive (D).
•The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
256
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
•You start your vehicle.
•The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an
alert indicator illuminates in the exterior
mirror on the side the approaching vehicle
is coming from. If you turn the direction
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors
E190708
The sensors are inside the brake lamp on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
may appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 124). The
alert indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.
Blind Spot Information System
with Trailer Tow (If Equipped)
E225007
257
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle and trailer, extending rearward
from the exterior mirrors to the end of your
trailer.
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
•You attach a trailer to your vehicle.
•You have set up the trailer to work with
the system through the information
display.
•You start your vehicle.
•You shift into drive (D).
•The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: If you switch the Blind Spot
Information System off, the Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
automatically turns off.
Note: If you connect a trailer to your vehicle
and do not set up the trailer through the
information display, the system turns off
and a warning message appears. See
Information Messages (page 124).
Note: When towing a trailer, the extended
blind spot zone range decreases to a short
fixed or non-variable distance behind the
trailer. The extended blind spot zone range
returns to 59 ft (18 m) when you disconnect
the trailer.
Setting up a Trailer
E225008
Trailer lengthA
Trailer widthB
Trailer hitch ballC
You can set-up a trailer to work with the
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 112).
When setting up a trailer, a sequence of
screens appear asking for trailer
information.
•Select type of trailer screen -
Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.
The system only supports conventional
trailers. If you select fifth wheel or
gooseneck, the system automatically turns
off.
•Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer
screen?
If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
•Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and
length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)?
If no, the system turns off.
If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.
•Trailer width measurement:
The width of the trailer is measured at the
front of the trailer. It is not measured at the
widest point of the trailer. The maximum
width at the front of the trailer that the
system can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).
258
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: You do not need to enter an exact
trailer width measurement. You only need
to confirm that the width of the trailer is
8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.
•Trailer length measurement:
The trailer length is the distance between
the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the
trailer. The maximum length that the
system can support is 33 ft (10.1 m).
•Enter length of trailer:
The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).
Toggling up or down using the menu
buttons increases or decreases the
measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select a length
that is equal to or within 3 ft (1 m) of the
actual measured length. For example, if
the actual measured length is 25 ft (7.6 m),
toggle the length in the menu to 27 ft
(8.2 m). When you enter the length of the
trailer, the system setup is saved.
Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or
cargo rack with electrical lighting, enter a
length of 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert
remains on for trailers with a length of 3 ft
(1 m) or less.
Note: Proper measurement and
measurement entry is required for the
system to function as designed.
System Operation
When you connect a trailer to your vehicle,
the trailer set up menu appears in the
information display. This menu allows you
to set up a new trailer or choose from a
previously set up trailer. A warning
message appears and the system turns off
if you do not choose or add a new trailer.
Note: The warning message may not
appear until your vehicle speed reaches
22 mph (35 km/h).
If you select a trailer in the information
display before connecting a trailer to your
vehicle, the system loads the configuration
for the selected trailer. When you connect
a trailer, a warning message appears.
Note: A second warning message may
appear stating that the Cross Traffic Alert
system has turned off. The Blind Spot
Information System with Trailer Tow
continues to function normally in this
situation.
Note: The system remembers the last
selected trailer set up when you start your
vehicle.
Trailer Considerations
The system is designed to work with a
trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m)
or less, and a total length from the trailer
hitch ball to the rear of the trailer of 33 ft
(10.1 m) or less.
Some trailers may cause a slight change
in system performance:
•Large box trailers may cause false
alerts to occur when driving next to
infrastructures or near parked cars. A
false alert may also occur while making
a 90-degree turn.
•Trailers that have a width greater than
8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a
total length greater than 20 ft (6 m)
may cause delayed alerts when a
vehicle is passing at high speed.
•Box trailers that have a width greater
than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front may
cause early alerts when you pass a
vehicle.
•Clam shell or V-Nose box trailers with
a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at
the front may cause delayed alerts
when a vehicle traveling the same
speed as your vehicle merges lanes.
259
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 124).
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 112). When you switch
the system off, a warning lamp illuminates
and a message displays. When you switch
the system on or off, the alert indicators
flash twice.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before reversing
out of a parking space. The cross traffic
alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
The system is designed to alert you of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
you shift into reverse (R).
Using the Cross Traffic Alert
System
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that approach with a speed up to 37 mph
(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).
260
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
261
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror
on the side the approaching vehicle is
coming from. A tone sounds and a
message appears in the information
display.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing in the distance.
Blocked Sensors
E190708
The sensors are inside the brake lamp on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R). See
Information Messages (page 124).
System Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
•The sensors are blocked.
•Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
•Vehicles approach at speeds greater
than 37 mph (60 km/h).
•The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
•You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a message
displays. See General Information (page
112).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the system off
using the information display. See General
Information (page 112). When you switch
the system off, a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 124).
Note: The system turns on each time you
switch the ignition on and you shift into
reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the
system off, it turns on the next time you
switch the ignition on.
262
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an
approved trailer tow module and tow bar,
the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault
is detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Obtain immediate service from an
authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•Correct tire pressures.
•Uneven tire wear.
•Loose or worn suspension
components.
•Loose or worn steering components.
•Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
263
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If
Equipped)
WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, cyclists or animals.
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead to
a crash or personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during cold
and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice,
rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the
system. Keep the front camera and radar
free of snow and ice. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: In situations where the
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running
pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system cannot help
prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and
speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active
at speeds above approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active
at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours, or
a pedestrian within your driving path, the
system provides three levels of
functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
E156131
264
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Alert: When active, the system provides a
flashing visual warning and an audible
warning sound.
Brake Support: Assists the driver in
reducing collision speed by preparing the
brake system for rapid braking. Brake
support does not automatically activate
the brakes, but if the driver presses the
brake pedal even lightly, brake support
could add additional braking up to full
force.
Active Braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
collision is imminent. The system may help
the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
the crash completely.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system
automatically disables when you select 4X4
LOW or when you manually disable
AdvanceTrac™.
Distance Indication and Alert
Distance indication and alert is a function
that provides the driver with a graphical
indication of the time gap to other
preceding vehicles traveling in the same
direction. The distance indication and alert
screen in the information display shows
one of the graphics that follow.
E254791
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication displays.
Note: Distance indication and alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
265
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Time GapDistance GapGraphicsSensitivitySpeed
>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
between
0.6sec and
0.9sec
56–82 ft
(17–25 m)
YellowNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal
62 mph
(100 km/h)
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the Alert and Distance Alert
sensitivity to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 112).
You can switch the Distance Indication and
Alert function off using the information
display controls. See General
Information (page 112).
If required, you can switch active braking
off using the information display controls.
See General Information (page 112).
If required, you can turn the entire
Pre-Collision Assist feature off using the
information display controls. See General
Information (page 112).
Note: We recommend that you turn the
system off if you install a snow plow or
similar object in such a way that it may
block the radar sensor. Your vehicle
remembers the selected setting across key
cycles.
Blocked Sensors
E249424
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
or camera appears in the information
display, the radar signals or camera images
are obstructed. The radar sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. With an obstructed
radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does
not function and cannot detect a vehicle
ahead. With the front camera obstructed,
266
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
the Pre-Collision Assist system does not
respond to pedestrians or stationary
vehicles and the system performance on
moving vehicles reduces. The following
table lists possible causes and actions for
when this message displays.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering
with the radar signals.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
impact.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front
of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is
dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the camera to detect that there
is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is
clean but the message remains in the
display.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor automatically recalibrates
successfully.
267
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
DRIVE CONTROL
Selectable Drive Modes
The system delivers a driving experience
through a suite of sophisticated electronic
vehicle systems. These systems optimize
steering, handling and powertrain
response. This provides a single location
to control multiple systems performance
settings.
Changing the drive mode automatically
changes the functionality of the following
systems:
•Electronic stability control and traction
control maintains your vehicle control
in adverse conditions or high
performance driving. See Stability
Control (page 227).
•Electronic throttle control enhances
the powertrain response to your inputs.
•Transmission controls are optimized
with shift schedules tuned to each
terrain.
Using the System
The system automatically tailors your
vehicle configuration for each mode you
select.
Column Shifter
E249567
Console Shifter
E184456
To change the drive mode setting, press
the drive mode button. The drive mode
selection menu appears in the instrument
cluster and allows you to select through
the available drive modes.
Note: Mode changes are not available when
the vehicle ignition is off. In drive (D), only
some modes may be available.
E225310
Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfort and
handling. This mode provides an
engaging drive experience and a direct
connection to the road without sacrificing
any of the composure demanded from
your vehicle.
E161509
Tow Haul – Improves
transmission operation when
towing a trailer or a heavy load.
E225312
Snow/Wet – For use during
inclement weather conditions.
Vehicle response becomes
tuned for optimum traction at lower
speeds and confidence inspiring stability
at higher speeds.
E194390
EcoSelect – Offers the best
possible fuel economy with
tradeoffs in vehicle performance
and comfort.
268
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
E176099
Sport – Use for spirted and
aggressive off road driving
situations. Vehicle response
becomes tuned for max off road
performance.
Note: Your vehicle may only be equipped
with some of the drive modes listed above.
Note: The system has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor the system for
proper operation. Certain drive modes are
not available based on the gearshift
position. If a mode is unavailable due to a
system fault or change in gearshift position,
the mode defaults to Normal.
E130458
Some drive modes reduce
traction and stability control
performance and the warning
indicator illuminates in the instrument
cluster. See Using Stability Control
(page 228).
269
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES (If
Equipped)
BoxLink™ Cleats
These cleats attach to the inner box walls
to help you to tie down cargo. The cleats
can be locked to prevent removal or
unlocked for removal.
BoxLink Cleats
Note: Leave the key in the lock when
removing or installing the cleats. The key
cannot be removed from the lock unless it
is in the locked position.
E184885
A. 275 lb (1,223 N) maximum force
between directly opposed cleats.
B. 600 lb (2,669 N) maximum force
between diagonally opposed cleats.
Secure cargo with up to 275 lb (1,223 N)
force applied between opposing box link
cleats, or up to 600 lb (2,669 N) force
applied between diagonal box link cleats.
Removing Locking BoxLink Cleats
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn
clockwise to unlock.
2. Pull bottom of the cleat outward while
pushing top of cleat down.
3. Hold on to the cleat as it clears the
mounting slot.
Installing Locking BoxLink Cleats
E189558
1. Insert the key into lock and turn
clockwise to unlock.
2. Insert the cleat into the mounting slot
and push upward. Make sure the cleat
is fully engaged.
270
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock.
4. Remove the key.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
E143816
PAYLOAD
271
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle
can be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
272
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR specified
on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating limitation
could result in serious damage to
your vehicle, personal injury or
both.
273
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
274
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles
may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
BED ACCESS (If Equipped)
Box Side Step
Use the step for easier access to the
vehicle bed.
Note: Close the step before driving.
Note: Do not exceed 500 lb (227 kg) on
the step. This includes you plus cargo.
Note: Do not use the step to lift the vehicle.
Only use proper jacking points.
Note: The step may operate more slowly
in cool temperatures.
Note: The step mechanism may trap debris
such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. This
may prevent the step from deploying
automatically when you press the button.
If this happens, make sure that you press
the button down and carefully pull out the
step manually. Wash off the debris with a
high-pressure sprayer and stow the step.
275
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
Deploying the Step
E167268
Push down on the button with your foot.
The step automatically extends from the
stowed position.
Stowing the Step
E167269
Push the step under your vehicle with your
foot until it fully latches. Do not push on
the button while stowing the step.
BED RAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING: When sliding the ramp
up or down, take care not to get your
fingers or hands caught in the mechanism.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Make sure that you
correctly install the ramp to the tailgate
plate. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not step or sit on the
ramp when it is in the stowed position.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Only install the ramp
within the prescribed ramp angles. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
Note: The ramp maximum capacity is
800 lb (363 kg).
Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground
before usage.
Note: For loading and unloading
equipment, your ramp should be set
between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees
downward to avoid damage to the ramp
claw and tailgate plate.
Note: When using your vehicle for off-road
operation, remove the bed ramps from the
vehicle and store them in a safe location
away from your vehicle.
Using the Bed Ramp
1. Remove the front and rear cables.
E194380
276
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew
the cam bolts.
3. Remove the ramp from the ramp
holder.
E211150
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the open position.
Note: You can use a smooth surface tool
to rotate the stops.
E194382
5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate
plate.
E194383
6. Pull the location pin outward and
extend the ramp until the pin is seated
in the usage position, then set the ramp
on even ground.
Stowing the Bed Ramp
1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin
outward.
2. Slide the ramp into the storage position
until the location pin locks.
Note: Make sure the proper pin location has
been applied for your bed size.
3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate
plate.
4. Rotate the stops at the underside of
the ramp to the closed position.
277
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
E194391
5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.
6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam
lever arms.
7. Attach the front and rear cables.
Note: Make sure you properly secure the
locking cable. If the locking cable is
unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise.
Installing the Ramp Holder
E194387
1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over
the mounting plate and rotate the
ramp holder into position.
E194388
2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards
into the installed position.
3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.
Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.
278
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR specified
on the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of your vehicle
and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the lowest rating capacity for your
vehicle or trailer hitch. Overloading
your vehicle or trailer hitch can
impair your vehicle stability and
handling. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not cut, drill,
weld or modify the trailer hitch.
Modifying the trailer hitch could
reduce the hitch rating.
Note: To prevent your trailer from
accumulating distance, and the
trailer information status appearing
when you restart your vehicle after
disconnecting your trailer, you must
deactivate your trailer. Using the
information display, go to the
Towing menu and then the Select
Trailer option. Select the No active
trailer option. See Information
Displays (page 112).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 334).
Your vehicle may have ability to
modify trailer towing features.
See General Information (page
112).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
279
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
•Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
271).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
280
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
TRAILER REVERSING AIDS (If
Equipped)
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: This system is an extra
driving aid. It does not replace your
attention and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.
Note: The system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices.
Note: You must always be aware of the
vehicle and trailer combination, and the
surrounding environment.
Note: The system does not detect or
prevent your vehicle or trailer from making
contact with obstacles in the surrounding
environment.
Note: Keep in mind that the front end of
your vehicle swings out when changing the
direction of the trailer.
Note: The system relies on user
measurements to determine sticker
placement and system limits. It is critical to
take the key measurements correctly.
Incorrect measurements can result in the
improper function of the system up to and
including contact between the vehicle and
trailer.
Note: The system limits vehicle speed when
backing up. The system is not a replacement
for proper use of the throttle and brake
pedals.
Principle of Operation
This feature helps you to steer your vehicle
when reversing with a trailer. Turn and hold
the control knob in the direction you want
the trailer to go and the system takes over
the steering. This allows you to focus on
checking the mirrors and operating the
brake and accelerator.
Each trailer you use with your vehicle has
to be setup once.
You must take care to follow the setup
process accurately, to make sure the
sticker is placed correctly.
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup
Assist
Note: Your vehicle saves the trailer
information when you enter it into the
system. A maximum of 10 trailers can be
added to the system.
Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer
Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect
the electrical wiring harness. Check to
make sure that the wiring is working. See
Essential Towing Checks (page 303).
281
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
E209759
Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a
level surface.
E209759
For best results, make sure that your trailer
rides level with the ground when you hitch
your vehicle. More information on selecting
your towbar is available in the Towing
section. See Towing (page 279).
E209760
Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle
are in line with each other. You can do this
by putting the transmission in drive (D) and
pulling straight forward.
Step 2: Follow the Information Display
Prompts
E209765
1. Press the button to turn the system on.
2. Select the option to add a trailer in the
instrument display, using the steering
wheel control. See General
Information (page 112).
3. Add a personalized name for the trailer
using the screen prompts. Use the
down arrow to scroll to the desired
letter and then press the right arrow to
advance to the next letter. Press OK to
continue.
4. Select the type of trailer brake system
for the trailer you are adding.
5. Select the brake effort level for the
trailer.
282
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Note: The default option is low. This is
recommended for most trailers. If the
trailer's brakes require more initial voltage,
or if you prefer more aggressive braking then
select the other options as required.
6. Select the trailer type.
Some examples of conventional type
trailers are shown below.
Note: You cannot use the system with the
types of trailers marked with the cross.
The system only works with
conventional trailers. It does not work
with other types including goose neck
and fifth wheel.
E209766
Follow the information display prompts.
Step 3: Place the Sticker on the Trailer
Frame
You must place the sticker in an area
visible by the rear view camera.
Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps
turn on automatically to improve visibility.
Note: An assistant can help to carry out the
following procedure.
Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the
rear view camera's view of the sticker. For
example, items such as a jack handle or
wiring.
Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and
clean horizontal surface. For best results
apply the sticker when temperatures are
above 32°F (0°C).
Note: Do not move stickers after they are
placed. Do not re-use any stickers if
removed.
Note: Additional stickers may be purchased
through your authorized dealer.
E209805
Use the supplied measurement card, a
tape measure and pen to carefully mark
the area where to attach the sticker. The
sticker is supplied in the back cover pocket
of your quick start guide. Make sure the
entire sticker is within the gray zone
between the two arcs or distance markers
on the diagram, and is also visible in the
rear view camera display.
Once you have found the correct location,
place the sticker.
Step 4: Take Measurements
After you place the sticker on the trailer
you must take some measurements.
Note: You must take accurate
measurements for the system to operate
properly.
283
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Note: When rounding in inches, round
upward if the measured length is a quarter
inch or greater. Round downward if the
measured length is less than a quarter inch.
For example 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be
rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in
(30.8 cm) would be rounded down to
12.00 in (30.48 cm).
Note: When rounding in centimeters, round
to the nearest whole centimeter. If the
measurement is less than 0.2 in (0.5 cm)
round downward. If the measurement is
more than or equal to 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round
upward. For example, 11.9 in (30.3 cm)
would be rounded down to 11.8 in (30 cm).
12.0 in (30.5 cm) would be rounded up to
12.2 in (31 cm).
Note: Use consistent metric or imperial
units as required by your country or vehicle.
The measurement card requires you to
record four key distances (A, B, C, D).
Record the trailer name for these
measurements.
E209806
A
B
C
D
D
Distance A
The horizontal distance from the license
plate to the center of the ball hitch on the
trailer.
Distance B
The horizontal distance from the center of
the ball hitch to the center of the sticker.
Distance C
The distance from the rear view camera to
the center of the sticker.
Distance D
The horizontal distance from the tailgate
to the center of the trailer axle (single axle
trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers
with dual axles or more).
Note: Round distance D to the nearest inch.
Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the
Information Display
Using the measurements you record, enter
the required data into the system. Follow
the on screen prompts to enter each of the
measurements taken in step 4. Use the up
and down arrows to increase or decrease
the numbers as necessary. Press OK to
confirm each measurement. When you add
the last measurement, the information
display shows all of the measurements
you entered. You can choose to confirm or
change the measurements.
Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location
Check the rear view camera display to see
if the system identifies the sticker. The
system marks the sticker with a red circle.
Confirm that the red circle shows over the
sticker image in the rear view camera
display.
Note: If the system cannot locate the
sticker, try cleaning the camera lens. Make
sure the sticker is within the zone as
indicated in step 3.
284
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Calibrating the System
To complete setup, drive your vehicle
straight forward between 4–24 mph
(6–39 km/h), as directed by the
information display.
The information display shows a message
during calibration and after calibration is
complete
Note: Keep the steering wheel straight
during the calibration process. If the steering
wheel is in a turned position, the calibration
pauses. The information display prompts
you to drive straight forward to complete
the calibration.
Note: For best results, do not calibrate the
system at night.
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist
To use the system, press the button and
select the trailer from the display.
E209765
When the sticker is located, the display
prompts you to shift into reverse (R). The
system turns on.
Note: The system does not function if your
hands are on the steering wheel. Remove
your hands to resume operation.
Follow the screen prompts to steer your
vehicle and trailer.
Note: You may have to drive forward to
straighten the trailer.
Take your hands off the steering wheel and
turn the Pro Trailer Backup Assist control
knob instead. The knob acts as the steering
control for the trailer.
Note: The more you turn the knob, the
sharper the trailer turns.
285
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
E209812
Turn and hold counterclockwise to make
the trailer go left.
E209813
Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer
go right.
Note: Practice maneuvering with the
system in a safe open area first.
Note: Try backing up in a straight line and
then turning the knob slowly in the direction
you want to go.
Note: Quickly turning and releasing the
knob results in a jerky movement of the
vehicle.
E209814
Release the knob when the trailer is
moving in the direction you want. Control
the accelerator and brakes while the
system steers your vehicle automatically
to keep the trailer moving straight back.
Note: You may have to use the knob to
correct the trailer direction when attempting
to move the trailer straight back under some
conditions.
Note: The system limits the vehicle speed.
Note: When you release the knob or turn it
to the center position, your vehicle follows
the trailer's path.
Troubleshooting
Note: The system requires a clear view of
the sticker placed on the trailer. You must
keep the camera lens and sticker clean for
the system to operate correctly.
Setup
The system is designed to be used with a
wide variety of trailers. There are some
trailers that do not have a proper surface
and location to mount the sticker. These
trailers are not supported. Attempts to
place the sticker on a surface that does
not meet the sticker placement
requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup
instruction or entering inaccurate
measurements to proceed through setup
can result in improper system function.
Accurate measurements are critical for
correct system function. If you need to
check measurements entered or change
them you can access them through the
instrument cluster. Choose the option to
change the sticker from the change trailer
settings menu. It is not necessary to
remove the sticker if you are just reviewing
or changing measurements.
The following menu warnings or difficulties
may occur during setup. Tips to resolve
them are listed below.
286
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Note: If you still experience issues with the
system's ability to detect the sticker, see
the information in the next section regarding
sticker lost during system operation.
Measurement A has reached maximum or
minimum value:
•The system is designed to work with
drawbars that have a license plate to
hitch ball center measurement of 9 in
(23 cm) to 16 in (41 cm) when installed.
Do not attempt to use drawbars that
have a length outside this range as the
system performance will be degraded
and could cause improper system
function.
•Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from license plate and the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and makes
it inaccurate. Inaccurate
measurements degrade system
performance and could cause improper
system function. See step 4 of the
setup instruction to review
measurement instructions.
Measurement B has reached maximum or
minimum value:
•Make sure that the sticker placement
instruction in step 3 of the setup has
been followed. Stickers placed outside
the allowed zone will adversely affect
the system performance and could
cause improper feature function.
•Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from center of sticker to the hitch ball
center. A straight line distance that
includes any vertical rise or drop
increases the measurement and
causes an inaccurate value to be
entered into the system. See step 4 of
the setup for additional measurement
instructions.
Measurement C has reached maximum or
minimum value:
•Make sure you follow the sticker
placement instructions in step 3 of the
setup. Stickers placed outside the
allowed zone adversely affect the
system performance and could cause
improper feature function. If you have
met all the criteria for sticker
placement and you see this message,
the sticker is either too far below or too
close to the camera to properly
recognize the sticker. In order for the
system to operate correctly, the sticker
height must be lowered if you receive
the minimum warning or the sticker
height must be raised if you receive the
maximum warning.
•Only one sticker can be placed on the
trailer for correct system function. The
previous sticker must be removed or
covered so only one sticker is visible to
the camera.
•Measurement B and C must be
measured again if a new sticker is
placed on the trailer.
Measurement D has reached maximum or
minimum value:
•Make sure that the measurement being
made is the horizontal distance only
from tailgate to the center of the single
axle or the center of all the axles on the
trailer. See step 4 of the setup for
additional measurement instructions.
The system does not support trailer
lengths outside the range allowed by
the information display.
287
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
System is circling something beside the
sticker or system cannot find the sticker:
•Make sure the rear camera is clean and
the sticker is clearly visible in the
camera image. Clean the camera and
sticker if necessary.
•The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate sticker
measurements degrade the system’s
ability to locate the sticker. Verify the
measurements you enter into the
system are accurate.
•Remove the incorrectly circled label or
decal if possible.
•If you cannot resolve the issue, try a
new sticker location. The sticker
location must still meet the
requirements noted in step 3 of the
setup instructions. Only one sticker can
be placed on the trailer for correct
system function. The previous sticker
must be removed or covered so only
one sticker is visible to the camera.
Calibration
The system monitors various vehicle
parameters to ensure your vehicle is being
driven straight and the trailer is straight
behind your vehicle. Any steering input or
trailer movement pauses the calibration.
For best results:
•Use a long, straight, smooth and level
road when attempting to calibrate.
•Drive straight forward.
•Drive between 4–24 mph
(6–39 km/h).
System Operation
The following warnings or difficulties may
occur during feature operation. Tips to
resolve them are listed below.
The system is not available:
•The system relies on many
sub-systems in your vehicle to operate
correctly. If those sub-systems are not
operating correctly, the system may
not be available.
•Low battery voltage is a condition
which prevents the system from
operating. Please make sure the
battery is correctly charged if the
system is not available.
•You may need to drive your vehicle
straight forward above 25 mph
(40 km/h) before the system is
available again.
•If the message continues to display,
see your authorized dealer for service.
Sticker lost:
•If the system cannot initially find the
sticker, it may be necessary for you to
change the lighting conditions by
moving the vehicle and trailer or
waiting until conditions change.
•Check for the following if you receive
the lost sticker message while using
the system.
•Stop your vehicle as soon as the
message displays.
•Make sure the sticker is visible and the
pattern is discernable in the rear view
camera image.
•Clean the sticker and camera to make
sure they are unobstructed.
•Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free
cloth and water.
•Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbing
alcohol sprayed directly onto the
sticker, and then wipe clean with a soft
cloth.
288
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
•Remove any items that may be
blocking the view of the sticker.
Depending on your trailer configuration
and any equipment mounted to your
trailer, it is possible for the sticker to be
blocked from view of the camera as it
rotates on the hitch ball but not be
blocked during setup. Remove the
obstruction if possible. It may be
necessary to remove the sticker from
its current location if the obstruction
cannot be cleared. Place a new sticker
that is visible to the camera in all
positions of the trailer behind your
vehicle.
•Placing the sticker on a surface angled
away from the vehicle reduces
performance. Use a drawbar that
positions the trailer level to the ground
when attached to the vehicle. This
typically provides a level surface to
mount the sticker. Place the sticker on
a bracket or other object when no level
surface is available.
•Make sure the entire sticker is on a flat
surface that is completely visible to the
camera. Do not fold the sticker over an
edge on the trailer frame. This can
degrade performance.
•Shadows on the sticker may effect
tracking performance under some
lighting conditions. Moving the sticker
to another location within the allowed
placement area may improve
performance. Use the change sticker
option in the information display menu
if you move the sticker.
•You can change your sticker location
by going into the information display
menu, selecting trailer options,
selecting change trailer settings and
then selecting the change sticker
option. The previous sticker must be
removed. ONLY ONE STICKER
SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE
TRAILER FOR CORRECT SYSTEM
FUNCTION.
•The camera system uses the entered
measurements to help locate the
sticker. Inaccurate measurements
reduce the system’s ability to locate
the sticker. Check the measurements
entered into the system are correct.
Refer to step 4 of setup for instructions
on measurements.
•You can change your measurement by
going into the information display
menu, selecting trailer options,
selecting change trailer setting and
then selecting the change sticker
option. Disregard the prompt to remove
this sticker and continue to the next
step if you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System does not reverse straight:
•Factors such as the drawbar
connection to the hitch receiver, road
camber, road grade and compliance in
the trailer suspension can influence
how straight the system is able to
reverse your trailer when the knob is
not turned. You can compensate for
the trailer drifting to the right or left by
slowly turning the knob until the trailer
is following your desired path and then
holding the knob in that position. If you
would like to recalibrate the system for
straight backing, you can do so with the
following procedure.
•Go into the information display menu,
select trailer options, select change
trailer setting and then select the
change sticker option. Your saved
measurements display. Do not change
them but continue to confirm
measurements. Once you confirm the
measurements, the system then
prompts you to perform the calibration
procedure.
289
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum
trailer angle Press Knob to Exit:
•The system uses your measurements
to determine sticker position and
establish system limits. Accurate
sticker placement and trailer
measurements provide the best
system performance. If you are
consistently receiving this warning, it is
likely there is an issue with sticker
placement or the entered
measurements. Make sure that the
sticker is placed correctly based on
step 3 and the measurements were
made correctly according to step 4.
The troubleshooting guide for trailer
measurements can also be reviewed
for help in making measurements.
•To change sticker location or change
trailer measurements, go into the
information display menu, select trailer
options, select change trailer setting
and then select the change sticker
option.
•If the sticker location needs to be
changed, the previous sticker must be
removed and a new sticker needs to
be placed on the trailer. ONLY ONE
STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON
THE TRAILER FOR PROPER
SYSTEM FUNCTION.
•Disregard the prompt to remove this
sticker and continue to the next step if
you only plan to update the
measurements for the current sticker
location.
System consistently shows Pro Trailer
Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control
of Steering Wheel:
•The system displays this warning when
it can no longer steer the vehicle and
you must take over steering. There are
four reasons why this warning displays
and additional information regarding
the reason for the warning is available
on the center display.
•The steering wheel is touched while
under system control. Avoid touching
the wheel during system operation.
•The maximum speed for feature
operation is exceeded. System
performance is optimized at slower
speeds. Reverse slowly.
•The sticker was lost by the camera
system. Once your vehicle is stopped,
additional warnings indicate the sticker
was lost. Refer to sticker lost
troubleshooting tips.
•An internal condition for system
operation was not met which requires
your vehicle return to manual control
of the steering.
Note: The system is designed to be used
with the same trailer connection every time
the trailer is chosen from the selection
menu. When using a different drawbar or a
different pin hole on drawbars with more
than one, connecting the drawbar to your
vehicle affects the trailer measurements.
Take the measurements again and update
if required.
290
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 270).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed a trailer
weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when
towing with, or by, the bumper only.
Note: For vehicles equipped with
2.7L and 3.3L engines without a
Heavy Duty Towing Package, do
not exceed a trailer weight of
5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when using the
trailer hitch.
Note: For vehicles equipped with
3.5L and 5.0L engines without a
Heavy Duty Towing Package, do
not exceed a trailer weight of
7,000 lb (3,175 kg) when using the
trailer hitch.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Vehicles not equipped with the
Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy
Duty Payload Package should not
exceed 11 ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal
area. Vehicles equipped with the
Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy
Duty Payload Package should not
exceed 18 ft² (5.6 m²) trailer
frontal area. All values calculated
with SAE J2807 method.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
291
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following charts.
Driveline – 4x2 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
9,500 lb
(4,308 kg) 3
3.55
3.3L TiVCT
Regular cab –
122
12,100 lb
(5,489 kg)
3.73
12,200 lb
(5,534 kg)
3.15, 3.31
2.7L GTDI 13,100 lb
(5,942 kg)
3.73
13,000 lb
(5,896 kg)
3.15, 3.31
5.0L TiVCT 13,800 lb
(6,260 kg)
3.55
9,700 lb
(4,400 kg) 3
3.55
3.3L TiVCT
Regular cab –
141 12,200 lb
(5,534 kg)
3.73
292
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
3.15, 3.31
2.7L GTDI 13,200 lb
(5,987 kg)
3.73
13,300 lb
(6,032 kg) 5
3.73
13,900 lb
(6,305 kg)
3.15, 3.31
5.0L TiVCT 14,900 lb
(6,759 kg)
3.55
16,000 lb
(7,257 kg)
3.73
15,500 lb
(7,031 kg)
3.15, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 17,000 lb (7,711 kg)
4
3.55
17,100 lb (7,756 kg)
4
3.73
9,800 lb
(4,445 kg) 3
3.55
3.3L TiVCT
Super Cab – 145 12,200 lb
(5,534 kg)
3.73
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
3.15, 3.31
2.7L GTDI
293
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
14,200 lb
(6,441 kg)
3.15, 3.31
5.0L TiVCT 15,200 lb
(6,895 kg)
3.55
15,800 lb
(7,167 kg)
3.15, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 17,100 lb (7,756 kg)
4
3.55
15,700 lb (7,121 kg)3.31
3.0L Diesel 17,100 lb (7,756 kg)3.55
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.15, 3.31
2.7L GTDI
Super Cab – 163
13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
14,100 lb
(6,396 kg) 5
3.73
14,300 lb
(6,486 kg)
3.15, 3.31
5.0L TiVCT 15,300 lb
(6,940 kg)
3.55
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
3.73
294
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
15,900 lb
(7,212 kg)
3.15, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 17,100 lb (7,756 kg)
4
3.55
17,100 lb (7,756 kg)
4
3.73
9,900 lb
(4,491 kg) 3
3.55
3.3L TiVCT
Crew cab – 145
12,300 lb
(5,579 kg)
3.73
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
3.15, 3.31
2.7L GTDI 13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
14,200 lb
(6,441 kg)
3.15, 3.31
5.0L TiVCT 15,200 lb
(6,895 kg)
3.55
15,800 lb
(7,167 kg)
3.15, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 18,400 lb
(8,346 kg) 6
3.55
16,100 lb
(7,303 kg)
3.153.5L GTDI 10.5:1
CR
295
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
16,700 lb
(7,575 kg)
3.55
15,800 lb
(7,167 kg)
3.31
3.0L Diesel
17,100 lb (7,756 kg)3.55
12,700 lb
(5,761 kg)
3.15, 3.31
2.7L GTDI
Crew cab – 157
13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
14,100 lb
(6,396 kg) 5
3.73
14,200 lb
(6,441 kg)
3.15, 3.55
5.0L TiVCT 16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
3.73
15,900 lb
(7,212 kg)
3.15, 3.55
3.5L GTDI
296
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x2 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg) 6
3.55
17,100 lb (7,756 kg)
4
3.73
1 For vehicles without a Heavy Duty Towing Package, do not exceed a
trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg)
2 Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).
3 Medium Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Max trailer
weights by engine: 3.3L and 2.7L GTDI = 6000 lb, 5.0L, 3.5L GTDI and
3.0L Diesel = 7000 lb
4 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on all
models except vehicles with 3.5L GTDI Heavy Payload Package (HPP).
5 MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.
6 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on 3.5L
GTDI Heavy Frame Crew Cabs only.
297
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
9,700 lb
(4,400 kg) 3
3.55
3.3L TiVCT
Regular cab –
122
12,200 lb
(5,534 kg)
3.73
12,500 lb
(5,670 kg)
3.55
2.7L GTDI 13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
13,200 lb
(5,987 kg)
3.31, 3.55
5.0L TiVCT 14,600 lb
(6,622 kg)
3.73
12,200 lb
(5,534 kg)
3.73
3.3L TiVCT
Regular cab –
141
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.55
2.7L GTDI 13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
14,100 lb
(6,396 kg) 5
3.73
14,100 lb
(6,396 kg)
3.31, 3.55
5.0L TiVCT 16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
3.73
16200 lb (7348
kg)
298
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
16,100 lb
(7,303 kg) 7
3.73
16,100 lb
(7,303 kg) 8
15,800 lb
(7,166 kg)
3.31, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 17,100 lb
(7,756 kg) 4
3.55
17,100 lb
(7,756 kg) 4
3.73
12,500 lb
(5,670 kg)
3.73
3.3L TiVCT
Super Cab – 145
12,800 lb
(5,806 kg)
3.55
2.7L GTDI 13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
14,299 lb
(6,486 kg) 5
3.73
14,299 lb
(6,486 kg)
3.31
5.0L TiVCT 14,400 lb
(6,532 kg)
3.55
16,500 lb
(7,484 kg)
3.73
299
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
16,000 lb
(7,257 kg)
3.31, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 17,100 lb
(7,756 kg) 4
3.55
14,400 lb
(6,532 kg)
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
Super Cab – 163
14,500 lb
(6,577 kg)
3.55
16,600 lb
(7,530 kg)
3.73
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
3.73
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
3.31, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 16,200 lb
(7,348 kg) 4
3.55
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg) 4
3.73
12,600 lb
(5,715 kg)
3.733.3L TiVCT
Crew cab – 145 12,900 lb
(5,851 kg)
3.55
2.7L GTDI 13,300 lb
(6,033 kg)
3.73
300
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
14,300 lb
(6,486 kg) 5
3.73
14,300 lb
(6,486 kg)
3.31
5.0L TiVCT 14,400 lb
(6,532 kg)
3.55
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
3.73
16,100 lb
(7,303 kg)
3.31, 3.55
3.5L GTDI 18,400 lb
(8,346 kg) 6
3.55
16,100 lb
(7,303 kg)
3.31
3.5L 10.5:1 CR 16,700 lb
(7,575 kg)
3.55
16,000 lb
(7,257 kg)
3.31, 3.55
3.0L Diesel 17,100 lb
(7,756 kg)
3.55
14,400 lb
(6,532 kg)
3.31
5.0L TiVCT
Crew cab – 157 14,500 lb
(6,577 kg)
3.55
16,900 lb
(7,666 kg)
3.73
301
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Driveline – 4x4 1
Maximum GCWR
(Calculated with
SAE J2807
method)2
Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-
base (inches)
16,200 lb
(7,348 kg)
3.73
16,100 lb
(7,303 kg)
3.31, 3.55
3.5L GTDI
18,400 lb
(8,346 kg) 6
3.55
17,000 lb (7,711 kg)
7
3.73
17,100 lb
(7,756 kg) 8
16,100 lb
(7,303 kg)
3.31, 3.55
3.0L Diesel
17,100 lb (7,757 kg)3.55
1 For vehicles without a Heavy Duty Towing Package, do not exceed a
trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg)
2 Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).
3 Medium Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Max trailer
weights by engine: 3.3L and 2.7L GTDI = 6000 lb, 5.0L, 3.5L GTDI and
3.0L Diesel = 7000 lb
4 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on all
models except vehicles with 3.5L GTDI Heavy Payload Package (HPP).
5 MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.
6 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on 3.5L
GTDI Heavy Frame Crew Cabs only
7 17 Inch Rims.
8 18 Inch Rims.
302
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Calculating the Maximum
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
previous charts.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
•Vehicle curb weight.
•Hitch hardware weight, for
example a draw bar, ball, locks
or weight distributing hardware.
•Driver weight.
•Passenger(s) weight.
•Payload, cargo and luggage
weight.
•Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 560).
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
See Load limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load. See Load Limit (page 271).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
E193232
303
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)1
Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
1 Your vehicle must recognize the trailer
before the trailer can receive power.
Recognizing a Trailer
1. Attach the trailer and wiring connector
to your vehicle.
2. Switch on your vehicle.
3. Press the brake pedal for a few
seconds.
A confirmation message appears in the
information display. See General
Information (page 112).
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% of the total weight of the
trailer is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is
higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
a quarter the way down from H2,
toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
•Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
•Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
•Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
304
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper. Always connect the safety chains
to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer
hitch.
Install trailer safety chains to the trailer
hitch as recommended by the
manufacturer. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
E265060
If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch,
make sure the latch is fully closed.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)
WARNING: Use the integrated trailer
brake controller to properly adjust the
trailer brakes and check all connections
before towing a trailer. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
E183395
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
You can adjust the level of initial trailer
brake output by selecting one of three
settings using the information display.
Choose Low, Medium or High for the initial
trailer brake output you require. See
Information Displays (page 112).
305
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
The controller user interface consists of
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). The gain setting displays in the
message center.
The controller shows gain setting, output
bar graph, and trailer connectivity status
in the information display. They appear in
the information display as follows:
•Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
trailer connected): Shows the current
gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control
lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
•Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
•Trailer Connected: Displays when the
system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle.
•Trailer Disconnected: Displays,
accompanied by a single audible time,
when the system senses a trailer
connection and then a disconnection,
either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle. It also
displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear
disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control
lever without a trailer connected. After
disconnecting the trailer connector,
press the brake pedal for
approximately five seconds to allow
the system to detect and update the
trailer status.
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to turn on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
•Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever illuminates both the trailer brake
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps
except the center high-mount stop
lamp, if you make the proper electrical
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates
both trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake
Controller Mode
Select the correct option using the
information display. Choose electric for
trailers with electromagnetic drum brakes
or EOH for trailers with electric over
hydraulic brake systems. See Information
Displays (page 112).
Trailer Brake Effort Setting
The trailer brake controller allows the user
to customize how aggressively the trailer
brakes engage. The default value is "Low"
and is the recommended setting for most
trailers. If your trailer's brakes require more
initial voltage, or if you prefer more
aggressive trailer braking, then select either
the "Medium" or the "High" setting.
306
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
message confirming connection
appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display
Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
A message indicating a trailer brake
module fault may display in response to
faults sensed by the trailer brake controller,
accompanied by a single tone. If this
message appears, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis
and repair. The controller may still
function, but performance may be
degraded.
A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
may display when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If this
message displays, accompanied by a
single tone, with no trailer connected, the
problem is with your vehicle wiring
between the trailer brake controller and
the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the
message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
307
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
•Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
•Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
•Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
•Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
•The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11.2 mph
(18 km/h) so trailer and vehicle braking
is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only
available when applying the brakes
using your vehicle's brake pedal, not
the controller.
•The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
•Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
•When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
•The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp
wiring; this may damage the electrical
system resulting in fire. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring
installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an
integral hitch and only requires a ball with
a one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shank
diameter. The bumper has a 5,000 lb
(2,268 kg) trailer weight and a 500 lb
(227 kg) tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ball
position, you must install a frame-mounted
trailer hitch.
308
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
•When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
•If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
•If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
filled with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414).
•Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
temporary spare tire is different in diameter
or width, tread-type, or is from a different
manufacturer than the road tires on your
vehicle. Consult information on the tire
label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
309
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the
components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when
being towed.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
•Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
206).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 142).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are designed to prevent damage
to your transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot tow a two-wheel drive vehicle
with any wheels on the ground as vehicle
or transmission damage may occur. You
must tow your vehicle with all four wheels
off the ground, such as when using a
car-hauling trailer.
310
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles
You can only tow a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels on the ground by
placing the transfer case in its neutral
position and engaging the
four-wheel-down towing feature. Perform
the steps outlined in the following section
after positioning your vehicle behind the
tow vehicle and properly securing them
together.
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Note: For F-150 Raptor, please refer to your
Raptor supplement guide.
Four-wheel-down Towing
1. Put the ignition in the on position, but
do not start the engine. If your vehicle
has an ignition key, turn the key to on.
If your vehicle has intelligent access,
press the engine START/STOP button
once without pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to
2H.
4. Shift the transmission to neutral (N).
5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch
from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five
times within seven seconds.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display confirms that your
vehicle is in neutral tow. This indicates that
your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels
on the ground.
Note: If you do not see the message in the
display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
This is normal.
6. Leave the transmission in neutral (N)
and turn the ignition as far as it can go
toward the off position. It does not turn
fully off when the transmission is in
neutral (N). If your vehicle has an
ignition key, you must leave the key in
the ignition while towing. To lock and
unlock your vehicle, use the keyless
entry keypad or an extra set of keys. If
your vehicle has intelligent access,
press the engine START/STOP button
once without pressing the brake pedal.
You do not need to leave your keys in
the vehicle. You can lock and unlock
your vehicle as you normally do.
7. Release the brake pedal.
WARNING: Do not disconnect the
battery during recreational towing. It
prevents the transfer case from shifting
properly and may cause the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer case
to its neutral position for recreational
towing may cause the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in park (P). It may
injure the driver and others. Make sure you
press the foot brake and the vehicle is in a
secure, safe position when you shift to
neutral (N).
Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position while towing the vehicle
can damage vehicle components.
Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver's door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position. A message
displays in the information display
confirming your vehicle is in neutral tow.
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position:
311
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
1. With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in
the on position, but do not start the
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition
key, turn the key to on. If your vehicle
has intelligent access, press the engine
START/STOP button once without
pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Place the transmission back into park
(P).
4. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 4X2, and
Neutral Tow Disabled.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position, this is normal.
Note: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward
displays in the instrument cluster, transfer
case gear tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions following this section.
5. Apply the parking brake, then
disconnect your vehicle from the tow
vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the
engine, and shift the transmission into
drive (D) to make sure the transfer
case is out of the neutral tow position.
7. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of neutral (N),
set the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.
Resolving the Shift Delayed Pull Forward
Message
If the instrument cluster displays Shift
Delayed Pull Forward, perform the
following:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into neutral (N),
then start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission into drive (D) and let the
vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m).
You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
4. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays Neutral Tow Disabled.
312
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
•Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
•Revving the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
•Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
•To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
313
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING
In addition to providing an excellent
on-road driving experience, your vehicle
excels at all types of off-road driving. The
truck has been designed and equipped to
allow you to explore those places where
the road doesn’t take you whether it’s a
forest trail or the open desert. Before going
off-roading, consult with your local
governmental agencies to determine
designated off-road trails and recreation
areas. Also, be sure to understand any
off-road vehicle registration requirements
for the area in which you plan on driving.
Tread Lightly is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nation’s wilderness areas. Ford joins
the U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other
public and private lands by treading lightly.
Before taking your vehicle off-roading, a
basic vehicle inspection should be done to
make sure that the vehicle is in top working
condition.
It is always recommended that at least
two vehicles are used while off-roading.
The buddy system helps make sure that
help is close at hand should a vehicle
become stuck or damaged. It is also wise
to take supplies such as a first aid kit,
supply of water, tow strap, cell or satellite
phone with you any time an off-road
excursion is planned.
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques
•Grip the steering wheel with thumbs
on the outside of the rim. This will
reduce the risk of injury due to abrupt
steering wheel motions that occur
when negotiating rough terrain. Do not
grip the steering wheel with thumbs
inside the rim.
•Throttle, brake and steering inputs
should be made in a smooth and
controlled manner. Sudden inputs to
the controls can cause loss of traction
or upset the vehicle, especially while
on sloped terrain or while crossing
obstacles such as rocks or logs.
•Look ahead on your route noting
upcoming obstacles, surface texture
or color changes or any other factors
which may indicate a change in
available traction, and adjust the
vehicle speed and route accordingly.
During pre-run, mark obstacles with
GPS markers to make sure appropriate
speeds are used to avoid potential
vehicle damage.
•When driving off-road, if the front or
rear suspension is bottoming out
and/or excessive contact with the
skid-plates is encountered, reduce
vehicle speed to avoid potential
damage to the vehicle.
•When running with other vehicles, it is
recommended that communication is
used, and the lead vehicle notify other
vehicles of obstacles that could cause
potential vehicle damage.
314
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
•Always keep available ground
clearance in mind and pick a route that
minimizes the risk of catching the
underside of the vehicle on an obstacle.
•When negotiating low speed obstacles,
applying light brake pressure in
conjunction with the throttle will help
prevent the vehicle from jerking and
will allow you to negotiate the obstacle
in a more controlled manner. Using 4L
will also help with this.
•Use and equip supplemental safety
equipment as discussed later in this
chapter.
•Please consult your local off-road
group for other helpful tips.
•Off-roading requires a high degree of
concentration. Even if your local law
does not prohibit alcohol use while
driving off-road, Ford strongly
recommends against drinking if you
plan to off-road.
Crossing Obstacles
•Review the path ahead before
attempting to cross any obstacle. It is
best if the obstacle is reviewed from
outside the vehicle so that there is a
good understanding of terrain condition
both in front of and behind the
obstacle.
•Approach obstacles slowly and slowly
inch the vehicle over.
•If a large obstacle such as a rock
cannot be avoided, choose a path that
places the rock directly under the tire
rather than the undercarriage of the
vehicle. This will help prevent damage
to the vehicle.
•Ditches and washouts should be
crossed at a 45 degree angle, allowing
each wheel to independently cross the
obstacle.
Hill Climbing
WARNING: Extreme care should be
used when steering the vehicle in reverse
down a slope so as not to cause the vehicle
to swerve out of control.
•Always attempt to climb a steep hill
along the fall line of the slope and not
diagonally.
•If the vehicle is unable to make it up
the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back
down the slope. Place the vehicle in
low range and slowly back down in
reverse.
•When descending a steep slope, select
low gear and engage hill descent
control. Use the throttle and brake
pedals to control your descent speed
as described earlier in this section using
hill descent control. Note that hill
descent control is functional in reverse
and should be used in this situation.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
315
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
•Check that the horn works.
•Check that the exterior lights work.
•Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
316
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
SNOWPLOWING
We recommend the four-wheel drive F-150
in XL, XLT or Lariat trim levels with the 5.0L
engine and snowplow option for residential
snowplowing only. We do not recommend
the F-150 with the automatic four-wheel
drive system for snowplowing.
Do not use F-150 vehicles equipped with
the 2.7L, 3.0L, 3.3L or 3.5L engines for
snowplowing.
Installing the Snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
snowplow section, found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas.
A typical installation affects the following:
•Certification to government safety laws
such as occupant protection and airbag
deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
for an Alterer’s Label on your vehicle
from the snowplow installer certifying
that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
•The Front Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) is on the upper left side of the
vehicle’s Safety Compliance
Certification Label. This is the total
weight that front axle supports, which
includes the vehicle weight plus any
auxiliary equipment such as snowplow
frame-mounted hardware that can be
added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford
compliance certification to FMVSS. Do
not exceed FGAWR or Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
•Rear ballast weight behind the rear
axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
front-to-rear weight balance for proper
braking and steering.
•Front wheel toe may require
re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
the Ford Workshop Manual.
•Headlight aim may require adjustment.
•The tire air pressures recommended
for general driving are on the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label. The
maximum cold inflation pressure for
the tire and associated load rating are
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure
may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the
additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
•Federal and some local regulations
require additional exterior lamps for
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Contact
an authorized dealer for additional
information.
Snowplow Mode (If Equipped)
Press the snowplow button on the
instrument panel to switch on snowplow
mode. The button illuminates when in
snowplow mode. A message appears in
the information display indicating that
features are turned off when in snowplow
mode.
The following features are disabled when
in snowplow mode:
•110V inverter.
•Fog lamps.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated front and rear seats.
•Massaging seats.
The body module also activates the
snowplow relay that provides power to
aftermarket snowplow controls.
Switch off snowplow mode by pressing
the snowplow button or switching off the
ignition. The snowplow button is no longer
illuminated and features are turned on.
317
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
Note: The electrical system is designed to
support the addition of a residential
snowplow (up to 60 Amps continuous) and
snowplow lights (up to 20 Amps
continuous) using snowplow mode. The
system is not designed to support snowplow
usage with additional electrical aftermarket
accessories.
Operating the Vehicle with the
Snowplow Attached
Note: Drive the vehicle at least 500 mi
(800 km) before using your vehicle for snow
removal.
We recommend vehicle speed does not
exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when
snowplowing.
The attached snowplow blade restricts
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the
engine to run at a higher temperature.
Attention to engine temperature is
especially important when outside
temperatures are above freezing. Angle
the blade to maximize airflow to the
radiator and monitor engine temperature
to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your
Scheduled Maintenance information for
engine oil and transmission fluid change
intervals.
Snowplowing with your Airbag
Equipped Vehicle
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses
on a vehicle containing air bags as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your vehicle
(including hood, bumper system, frame,
front end body structure, tow hooks and
hood pins) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify or add equipment to
the front end of your vehicle.
Note: Please refer to the Body Builders
Layout Book for instructions about the
appropriate installation of additional
equipment.
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and
passenger airbag supplemental restraint
system. The supplemental restraint system
activates in certain frontal and offset
frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while
snowplowing, which results in significant
vehicle decelerations, can deploy the
airbag. Such driving also increases the risk
of accidents.
Never remove or defeat the tripping
mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle
and the snow removal equipment as well
as possible airbag deployment.
Engine Temperature while Plowing
Your engine may run at a higher
temperature than normal because the
attached snowplow blade restricts airflow
to the radiator:
318
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
•If you are driving more than 15 mi
(24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either
full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
•If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you do not
need to worry about blade position to
provide maximum airflow.
Transmission Operation while
Plowing
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
•Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)
when plowing in small areas at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)
when plowing larger areas or light snow
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h).
•Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.
Outside Air Temperature While
Plowing
While plowing with your vehicle, the plow
blade can block the sensor airflow and
cause the outside air temperature reading
to be inaccurate.
A Ford wiring kit is available to relocate the
Outside Air Temperature sensor to the
plow blade frame to provide more
accurate outside air temperature readings.
Contact an authorized dealer for more
information.
319
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
•24 hours a day, seven days a week.
•For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
•A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
•Battery jump start.
•Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
•Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
•Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
•Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
•Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
320
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
•Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
•Press the button again to switch them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
321
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not attach the cables
to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the
intake manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
322
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Do not attach the end
of the positive cable to the studs or
L-shaped eyelet located above the positive
(+) terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
WARNING: Do not connect the end
of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases
that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
323
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
•You press the hazard control button.
•You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
•Your vehicle runs out of power.
•Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Block the wheels to help
prevent the vehicle from moving.
WARNING: Unexpected and
possibly sudden vehicle movement may
occur if you do not take these precautions.
324
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. However, it is acceptable to
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle
configuration, you perform the following
before towing:
•If your vehicle has an electronic
shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make
sure you switch the four-wheel drive
control to the 2H position before
towing.
Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly
four-wheel drive vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground without disengaging
the front hubs may cause damage to the
automatic transmission.
Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or
an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel
drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or
faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause
damage to the automatic transmission.
TOWING POINTS
WARNING: Using recovery hooks is
dangerous and should only be done by a
person familiar with proper vehicle
recovery safety practices. Improper use of
recovery hooks may cause hook failure or
separation from the vehicle and could
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Always slowly remove
the slack from the recovery strap prior to
pulling. Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can cause
the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.
325
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Never link two straps
together with a clevis pin. These heavy
metal objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
•Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
•Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
•Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
•Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
•Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
•Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
•Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
•Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
326
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
•Owner Manuals.
•Maintenance Schedules.
•Recalls.
•Ford Extended Service Plans.
•Ford Genuine Accessories.
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
327
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number.
•Your telephone number (home and
business).
•The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
328
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
329
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
330
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
expcac@ford.com-+1 313 594 4857
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
prcac@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/A+1-313-594-4857Sub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
331
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
332
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
333
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the cover
to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 359).
E251921
334
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Horn.
25A1
1
Electric fan 1.
50A2
2
Windshield wiper motor.
30A2
3
Body control module.
60A2
4
Starter relay.
30A2
5
Power point 1.
20A2
6
Power point 2.
20A2
8
Rain sensor.
5A1
10
Upfitter 1 relay (Raptor).
15A2
12
4x4 run/start.
10A1
13
Adaptive cruise control run/start module.
Not used (spare).
15A1
14
Front view camera.
7.5A1
15
Voltage quality module.
Not used (spare)(Raptor).
15A 1
Powertrain control module.
10A1
16
Transmission control module run/start.
Anti-lock brakes run/start.
10A1
17
Electric power steering run/start.
10A1
18
Upfitter 5 relay (Raptor).
5A1
19
Blower motor.
40A2
20
Passenger seat motors.
30A2
21
Radio amplifier.
20A1
22
335
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Alt A sensor.
10A1
23
Trailer brake control module.
30A2
24
Body control module 1.
50A2
25
Electric fan (Gas).
50A2
26
Driver seat motors/memory module.
30A2
27
Heated seat.
15A1
28
4x4 solenoid.
10A1
29
Trailer tow battery charge.
25A2
30
Not used.—31
A/C clutch.
10A1
32
Not used.—33
Vehicle power 5 (Diesel).
10A1
34
Vehicle power 4 (Gas).
20A1
35
Vehicle power 4 (Diesel).
15A1
Vehicle power 3.
10A1
36
Vehicle power 2 (Gas).
25A1
37
Vehicle power 2 (Diesel).
15A1
Vehicle power 1 (Gas).
25A1
38
Vehicle power 1 (Diesel).
20A1
Not used.—39
Body-control-module voltage-quality-
module feed.
30A2
41
336
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Trailer tow lamps module.
20A2
43
Not used.—45
Steering-column lock.
10A1
46
Powertrain control heater 3 (Diesel).
50A2
47
Fuel filter heater (Diesel).
30A2
48
Not used.—49
Fuel pump.
30A2
50
Power point 3.
20A2
51
Powertrain control heater 2 (Diesel).
50A2
52
Trailer tow park lamps.
25A2
53
Not used.—54
Upfitter 2 relay (Raptor).
15A2
55
Not used.—56
USB smart charger.
5A1
58
Not used.—59
Not used.—60
Not used (spare).
15A1
61
Upfitter 6 relay (Raptor).
5A1
62
4x4.
25A1
63
E-locker.
15A1
64
Not used.—65
Not used.—66
Not used.—67
337
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Not used.—69
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) valves.
40A2
70
Electric parking brake.
4x4.
25A2
71
Not used.—72
Not used.—73
Trailer tow backup lamps.
10A1
74
Not used.—75
Body control module 2.
40A2
76
Climate controlled seat.
30A2
77
Spot light module.
10A1
78
Not used.—79
Heated windshield wiper.
10A1
80
Upfitter 4 relay (Raptor).
Not used.—81
Transmission fluid pump.
30A1
82
Powertrain control module (Diesel).
5A1
Transmission control module.
15A1
83
Not used.—84
Not used.—85
Not used.—86
Not used.—87
Multi-Contour Seats Relay.
10A1
88
Upfitter 3 relay (Raptor).
Power running boards.
30A2
89
338
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Not used.—91
Heated mirrors.
15A1
93
Rear heated seat module (Raptor, Diesel).
15A1
94
Not used (spare).
15A1
95
Not used.—96
Electric fan (Raptor).
40A2
97
Powertrain control heater 1 (Diesel).
50A2
10R transmission module r/s.
15A2
98
3.3L transmission fluid pump.
Heated rear window.
40A2
99
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) heater relay
(Diesel).
25A2
100
Electric fan (Base only).
25A2
101
Power sliding back window.
30A2
102
Trailer tow stop-turn relay fuse.
20A2
103
Snowplow switch.
15A1
104
Rear heated seats (Base).
Telescoping mirror.
10A1
105
1 Micro fuse.
2 Slotted M case fuse.
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingRelay Number
Powertrain control module relay.—R02
Electric fan relay.—R05
339
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of
the passenger footwell behind a trim panel.
To remove the trim panel, pull it toward
you and swing it away from the side. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves
on the panel, and then push it shut.
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in
the tabs on both sides of the cover, and
then pull it off.
To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the
top part of the cover on the fuse panel and
push the bottom part until it latches.
Gently pull on the cover to make sure it has
latched properly.
E145984
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Not used.—1
Memory module logic.7.5A2
Memory seat switches.
Lumbar motor.
Driver door lock motor.20A3
Trailer brake control.5A4
Not used (spare).20A5
Not used (spare).10A6
Not used (spare).10A7
Not used (spare).10A8
340
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Extended power module (Base only).10A9
Embedded modem module.5A10
Combined sensor module.5A11
Climate head module.7.5A12
Smart datalink connector.
Cluster.7.5A13
Steering column control module.
Brake on/off switch.10A14
Smart datalink connector.10A15
Tailgate release.15A16
Heads up display.5A17
Terrain switch.
Ignition switch and passive-entry passive-
start start stop switch.
5A18
Key inhibit solenoid.
Extended power module (except Raptor).7.5A19
Restraint control module (Raptor only).7.5A
Not used.—20
Heads up display.5A21
In car temperature with humidity sensor.
Passenger occupant detection. (Raptor
only)
5A22
Power driven rear glass switch.10A23
Inverter.
Driver side window.
Moonroof.
Vista roof.
Central lock/unlock.20A24
Driver door control module.30A25
Passenger door control module.30A26
Vista roof.30A27
Moonroof.
341
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse RatingFuse Number
Not used (spare).20A28
Not used (spare).30A29
Not used (spare).30A30
Adjustable pedal switch and motor.15A31
Multi-function display.10A32
SYNC.
Radio frequency receiver.
Radio.20A33
Run-start relay.30A34
Selectable drive mode switch.5A35
Upfitter switches (Raptor only).
360 camera module.15A36
Heated steering wheel module.
Rear-view mirror.
Rear heated seats.
Lane departure warning module.
Automatic high beam module.
Image processing module A.
Not used (spare).20A37
Rear window switches and motors.30A Circuit breaker38
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
342
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E267379
Micro 2.A
Micro 3.B
Maxi.C
Mini.D
M Case.E
J Case.F
J Case Low Profile.G
Slotted M Case.H
343
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
of the instrument panel.
E166491
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever
under the front of the hood near the
center of your vehicle.
344
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E190266
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
E249452
Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 358).
A.
Power distribution box. See
Fuses (page 334).
B.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 359).
C.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 350).
D.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 349).
E.
345
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 358).
F. Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 369).
G.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
353).
H.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.0L V6, DIESEL
E247635
Power distribution box. See
Fuses (page 334).
A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 350).
B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 349).
C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 358).
D.
Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 369).
E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
353).
F.
346
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 359).
G. H. Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 358).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.3L DURATEC - V6
E247636
Power distribution box. See
Fuses (page 334).
A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 350).
B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 349).
C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 358).
D.
Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 369).
E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
353).
F.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 359).
G.
Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 358).
H.
347
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
E258054
Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 358).
A.
Power distribution box. See
Changing a Fuse (page 342).
B.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 359).
C.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 350).
D.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 349).
E.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 358).
F.
Air filter. See Changing the
Engine Air Filter (page 369).
G.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
353).
H.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L MODULAR - V8
348
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E251845
Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 358).
A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 359).
B.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 350).
C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 349).
D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 358).
E.
Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 369).
F.
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
353).
G.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK -
GASOLINE
E161560
A B
MINA
MAXB
349
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - DIESEL
E249448
MINA.
FULLB.
MAXC.
ENGINE OIL CHECK -
GASOLINE
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 344).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 345).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 423).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
350
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 345).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 423). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
ENGINE OIL CHECK - DIESEL
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 344).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 345).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 423).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
351
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E258300
The American Petroleum Institute (API)
service symbol is used to identify the
proper engine oil for your engine. The API
service symbol will be displayed on the oil
container you purchase. The API symbol
displays the oil performance category in
the top half of the symbol and the viscosity
grade in the center of the symbol.
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 346).
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414).
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Conveni-
ence
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Reset
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
352
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 560).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
353
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 414).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
414).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
•Alcohol.
•Methanol.
•Brine.
•Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
354
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
•Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
•Engine power is limited.
•The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
355
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the coolant temperature
reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
356
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 560).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK
E170444
3
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
357
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.12 in (3 mm) from
the bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler hole.
Use only fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414).
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with
dirt, water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: A fluid level between the
MAX and MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to
add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414).
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford
specification. See Fuel Quality (page 186).
358
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Note: The in-tank pump will turn off
automatically after approximately 30
seconds.
The fuel water trap is above the frame rail
under the driver side of the vehicle.
E254226
Front of Vehicle.A
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Loosen the drain plug approximately
one and a half turns.
3. Allow the water to drain.
4. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a
strong resistance.
5. Key on for 30 seconds then key off.
Repeat twice.
6. Start the engine.
7. Check for leaks.
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will
go out after approximately 2 seconds, with
the engine running.
FUEL FILTER - DIESEL
Your fuel filters must be changed at the
correct service interval or when you see the
low fuel pressure message appear. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 560).
FUEL FILTER - GASOLINE
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or
with your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
359
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery does
not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the
power windows bounce-back feature.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 97).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 447).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
360
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
•Heated rear window.
•Heated seats.
•Climate control.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Audio unit.
•Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
361
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
E205141
2
3
4
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
3. Press the wiper blade secondary
locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
362
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On
the wall or screen you will observe a
light pattern with a distinct horizontal
edge toward the right. If this edge is not
at the horizontal reference line, you will
need to adjust the beam so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal
reference line.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs
have cooled down before removing them.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before
installing it.
363
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Accessing the Halogen High Beam,
Low Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs
1. Rotate the steering wheel to the
opposite side of the bulb needing
replacement.
2. Remove two screws and one push pin
from the front of the wheel liner.
E183762
3. Pull the wheel liner back towards the
tire to gain access to the bulbs.
Replacing the Halogen High Beam,
Low Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs
E183500
Low beam headlamp bulb.A.
Direction indicator bulb.B.
High beam headlamp bulb.C.
364
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E183763
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. For the high beam and low beam bulbs,
remove the rubber cap to access the
bulbs.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector.
5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Side Marker Bulb
E183764
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. With the hood open, locate the side
marker on the top of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pulling it straight
out.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Make sure the fog lamps are off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it from the fog lamp.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
365
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs (If
Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing LED Direction Indicator
and Side Marker Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamps are off.
2. Open the tailgate to access the rear
lamp assemblies
E187288
3. Remove the two bolts from the tail
lamp assembly. Then, carefully pull the
lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar
by releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
E187289
Brake, rear and direction
indicator bulb.
A.
Reverse lamp bulb.B.
1. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from
the rear lamp assembly.
2. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing LED Brake, Rear,
Direction Indicator and Reverse
Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-
mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the lamps are off.
2. Remove the four screws and move the
lamp assembly away from the vehicle
to expose the bulb sockets.
366
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E187290
3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it
counterclockwise and pulling it out of
the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot
Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp
Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb
Note: The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper.
E187794
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise
and carefully pull to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror
Direction Indicator Lamp Bulbs
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
367
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
21/5W7444NAFront direction indicator and parking lamps.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
65W9005Headlamp high beam.
55WH11Headlamp low beam.
55W9140Front fog lamps.
5WW5WFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDPuddle lamp.
27/8W3157Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator
and rear side marker lamps.1
16W921
Central high mounted brake lamp.1
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.Vehicles with
cargo box lamp.
27W3156KReversing lamps.
5W168License plate lamp.
1 May have optional LED lamps.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDGlove compartment lamp.
LEDLEDMap lamp.
LEDLEDRear dome and courtesy lamps.
LEDLEDRear cargo box lamps.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
368
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - GASOLINE
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not
allow foreign material to enter the air
induction system. The engine is susceptible
to damage from even small particles.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
414).
Change the air filter element at the proper
intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 560).
E191820
x2
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Install in the reverse order.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER - DIESEL
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Use the correct specification air filter
element. See Motorcraft Parts (page
419).
369
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 560).
E254171
1. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover. Lift and rotate the
air filter housing cover.
E254172
2. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
3. Install in the reverse order.
4. After installing a new air filter element,
you must reset the air filter restriction
gauge by pressing the reset button.
Air Filter Restriction Gauge
E254173
The air filter restriction gauge is in the
upper housing of the air filter assembly.
Check the air filter restriction gauge
whenever you open the hood to carry out
general engine maintenance or at least
every 7,500 mi (12,000 km). If you operate
your vehicle in extremely dusty conditions,
check the gauge at least every 500 mi
(800 km) or two weeks, whichever occurs
first. Change the air filter element when
the restriction gauge reads near the
change filter line and the gauge is yellow.
Allowing the restriction gauge to reach
maximum affects engine performance and
fuel economy.
370
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Operating your vehicle in heavy snowfall
or extreme rain conditions may allow
excessive amounts of snow or water into
the air intake system. This could restrict air
flow and cause the engine to lose power
or shut down.
After installing a new air filter element, you
must reset the gauge by pressing the reset
button.
After operating your vehicle during heavy
snowfall or extreme rain, do the following:
•Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open
the hood and clear any snow and ice
from the air filter housing inlet and
reset the air filter restriction gauge.
•Extreme rain: The air filter element
dries out after approximately 15–30
minutes of driving at highway speeds.
At the earliest opportunity, open the
hood and reset the air filter restriction
gauge.
371
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
372
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
•Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
•Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
•Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
•When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
•Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
•Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
•Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
•Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
•Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
•Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
•Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
373
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
•Roof racks.
•Bumpers.
•Grained door handles.
•Side moldings.
•Mirror housings.
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE EXHAUST
WARNING: Failure to keep the holes
in the exhaust tailpipe clean and free of
debris or foreign material may result in
blocked holes. Blocked holes may result
in increased exhaust gas temperatures,
vehicle damage, property damage or
personal injury.
374
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
E231484
The visible holes in the exhaust tailpipe
and the holes under the shield just inboard
of the right rear tire are functional. You
must keep the holes clean and free of
debris or foreign material to maintain the
correct operation of the exhaust system.
When washing your vehicle, spray the holes
with clean water from a hose. This helps
to keep the holes clean and free of debris
or foreign material.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
•Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
•For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
•Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
375
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
•If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp, white cotton
cloth, then use a clean and dry white
cotton cloth to dry these areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
•Be certain to wash or wipe your hands
clean if you have been in contact with
certain products such as insect
repellent and suntan lotion in order to
avoid possible damage to the interior
painted surfaces.
•Do not use household or glass cleaners
as these may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Damage may not be covered by your
warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,
white cotton cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, use a mild soap and water
solution. If the spot cannot be
completely cleaned by this method,
the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning
product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, white, cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow
this to set at room temperature for 30
minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not
soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the
area by using a rubbing motion for 60
seconds.
376
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a
clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Without King Ranch Edition
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
•Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
•Household cleaners.
•Alcohol solutions.
•Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in
premium, top-grain leather that is
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution.
•Clean spills as quickly as possible.
•Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather as
cleaners may darken the leather.
•Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
orange juice or oil-based products on
the leather as they may permanently
stain the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.
Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
evidence of naturally occurring markings,
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.
In order to lessen the appearance of
certain scratches and other wear marks,
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Conditioning section.
377
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Shop. Visit the website at
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United
States. If you are unable to obtain King
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another
premium leather conditioner.
•Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the Cleaning section.
•Make sure the leather is dry then apply
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
to a clean, dry cloth.
•Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS (If
Equipped)
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
378
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
•Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
•Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
•Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
•We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
379
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
•Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
•If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of
your vehicle and the ground is less than
that of other models. Drive with extreme
care to avoid damage to your vehicle.
380
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
Note: Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although
a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low
traction situations, it won't stop any faster
than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
at a safe speed.
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (if
equipped)
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
On some four-wheel drive models, the
initial shift from two-wheel drive to
four-wheel drive while the vehicle is
moving can cause a momentary clunk and
ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal
as the front drivetrain comes up to speed
and are not cause for concern.
Note: In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size
of the spare tire relative to the remaining
tires can have an effect on the 4x4 system.
If there is a significant difference between
the size of a spare and the remaining tires,
four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
212).
381
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
•Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
•Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
•Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
382
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
383
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
384
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
385
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
386
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph
(299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
387
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Treadwear: The treadwear
grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
BC
B
D
E142544
388
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
BCDE
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
389
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 270).
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe
tire cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label (affixed to either the
390
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
391
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size
and dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
392
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
WARNING: In general, tires
should be replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require
tires to be replaced more
frequently.
393
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: You should
replace your spare tire when you
replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has
not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels that
are the same size, load index,
speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as
those originally provided by Ford.
The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on the
B-Pillar or edge of the driver's
door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you
should contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Use of
any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect
the safety and performance of
your vehicle, which could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
394
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on
the sidewall of the tire to set the
beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures up
to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
•Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
•Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
•Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
•Use both eye and ear
protection.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer
or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair, except if the vehicle is
equipped with four wheel drive.
Vehicles equipped with four wheel
drive should have all four tires
replaced simultaneously.
Unevenly worn tires, mismatched
makes, models or brands can be
different in size, resulting in
potential damage to the four
wheel drive system.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
395
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is
stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
396
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label
shows different tire pressures for
the front and rear tires and the
vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you need
to update the settings for the
system sensors. Always perform
the system reset procedure after
tire rotation. If you do not reset the
system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram)
E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index and speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended
tires and wheels can cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or power
transfer unit failure. Follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
397
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch
post or the door edge that meets the door
latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
•If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
•Conventional link type chains may
contact and cause damage to the
vehicle's wheel house and/or body.
•Do not install chains on the front tires
as this may interfere with suspension
components.
•Only certain snow cables or chains
have been approved by Ford/Lincoln
as safe for use on your vehicle with the
following tires: 245/70R17,
LT245/70R17, 265/70R17 and
265/60R18.
•You should install snow cables or
chains that have been rated as SAE
Class S.
•Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines, or fuel lines.
•Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or
less if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
•Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
•Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Check each tire, including the
spare if applicable, monthly,
when cold and inflate to the
inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.
398
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale flashes for
approximately one minute and then
remains continuously illuminated. This
sequence continues upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful
interference.
•This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
399
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Periodically check the tire pressure, at least
monthly, using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle.
E224333
The low tire pressure warning light turns
on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When you replace one of your road tires
with the temporary spare, the system
continues to identify an issue to remind
you that the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly needs to be repaired and put
back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
400
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer Action RequiredPossible CauseLow Tire Pressure
Warning Light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label, on the edge
of driver door or the B-Pillar, drive your
vehicle for at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns
off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed, in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 383).
Tire rotation without
sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed, in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
401
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
When putting air into your tires, such as at
a gas station or in your garage, the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
immediately respond to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. When driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure.
If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING: To determine the
required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
(on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation on vehicles that require
different recommended tire pressures in the
front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated
to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
402
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
System reset tips:
•To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the
system reset procedure at least three
feet, one meter, away from another
Ford Motor Company vehicle
undergoing the system reset procedure
at the same time.
•Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system can time-out and you need
to repeat the entire procedure on all
four wheels.
•A double horn sounds indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph
(32 km/h) for at least two minutes,
then park in a safe location where you
can easily get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Switch the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If you successfully
enter the reset mode, the horn sounds
once, the system indicator flashes and
a message shows in the information
display. If this does not occur, please
try again starting at Step 2. If after
repeated attempts to enter the reset
mode, the horn does not sound, the
system indicator does not flash and no
message shows in the information
display, seek service from your
authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following clockwise order: Left front -
driver side front tire, Right front -
passenger side front tire, Right rear -
passenger side rear tire - Left rear,
driver side rear tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn tone confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
double horn is heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained, driver
side rear tire, the system indicator
stops flashing, and a message shows
in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.
403
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label, affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver door.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it may
not function.
Note: The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system and
should only be used in roadside
emergencies.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
system sensors. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 398). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels.
Full-size dissimilar spare
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, 4WD
functionality may be limited, especially
when driving in a mechanically locked 4WD
mode. You may experience the following:
•Additional noise from the transfer case
or other drive components.
•Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically
locked 4WD mode.
404
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
recommended that you do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD.
•Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is
stationary.
•Use 4WD on dry pavement.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•Four-wheel drive capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer.
•Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
•Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front
wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park (P),
set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to secure
the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed. For example, when
changing the front left wheel, place an
appropriate block or wheel chock on the
right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.
WARNING: No person should place
any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in an
emergency.
WARNING: The jack should be used
on level firm ground wherever possible.
405
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Check that the vehicle
jack is not damaged or deformed and the
thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your vehicle.
WARNING: It is recommended that
the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle
that is being jacked.
WARNING: Switch off the running
boards before jacking or placing any object
under your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Only use the spare tire carrier to stow
the tire and wheel combination provided
with your vehicle. Other tire and wheel
combinations can cause the tire carrier to
fail.
Note: Do not use impact tools or power
tools operating at over 200 RPM on the
spare tire carrier, this may cause a winch
malfunction and prevent a secure fit.
Override the winch at least three times,
there's an audible click each time, to make
sure the wheel and tire have been tightened
securely.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.
Remove the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag
The vehicle jack and tool bag are on the
rear passenger side of your vehicle, behind
the passenger seat.
E233621
1. Remove the foam top.
E233622
2. Release the strap securing the vehicle
jack and tool bag to the vehicle.
3. With slight downward pressure, slide
the vehicle jack and tool bag outward,
toward the passenger side of the
vehicle.
4. Lift the vehicle jack and tool bag off the
floor posts and remove from your
vehicle.
406
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E270943
5. With the vehicle jack and tool bag
removed from your vehicle, remove the
fuel funnel.
E233624
6. Release the D-ring straps.
E233625
7. Lift the tool bag off of the vehicle jack.
E233626
8. Remove the tools from the tool bag.
Note: Only F-150 Raptor trim vehicles
receive a wheel chock with the tool bag.
Note: No maintenance or addition
lubrication of your jack is required over the
service life of your vehicle.
Removing the Spare Tire
Note: Remove the hook end from the
assembled jack handle before continuing.
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper.
1. Use your key to remove the lock
cylinder from the access hole of the
bumper to allow access to the guide
tube.
407
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E188735
2. Assemble the jack handle as shown in
the illustration.
E184020
3. Fully insert the jack handle through the
bumper hole and into the guide tube
through the access hole in the rear
bumper.
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise until
the tire is lowered to the ground and
the cable is slightly slack to allow the
tire to be slid rearward from under the
vehicle.
5. Remove the retainer from the center
of the wheel.
E175447
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.
For example, if the left front tire is flat,
block the right rear wheel.
7. Obtain the spare tire and vehicle jack
from their storage locations.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut on the
affected flat tire one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them.
Jacking the Vehicle
E166722
408
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Front Jacking Points
E183709
Note: Use the frame rail as the front jacking
location point, not the control arm. The
frame rail is marked with an arrow.
Rear Jacking Points
E272477
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking
point next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the ground.
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
409
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the vehicle jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order shown.
See Technical Specifications (page
412).
6. Stow the flat tire. See the Stowing the
Flat or Spare Tire.
7. Stow the vehicle jack and lug wrench.
Make sure the jack is securely fastened
before you drive. See Stowing the
Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag.
8. Unblock the wheels.
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow the spare tire
stowage instructions may result in failure of
the cable or loss of the spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. Pull on the cable to
align the components at the end of the
cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The effort to
turn the jack handle increases
significantly and the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips when the tire is raised
to the maximum tightness. Tighten to
the best of your ability, to the point
where the ratchet or slip occurs, if
possible. The spare tire carrier does not
allow you to overtighten. If the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips with little
effort, contact your authorized dealer.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the
frame and is properly tightened. Try to
push or pull, then turn the tire to be
sure it does not move. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to
properly stow the spare tire may result
in failure of the winch cable and loss
of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure
when servicing the spare tire pressure,
every six months, as per your scheduled
maintenance information, or at any
time that the spare tire is disturbed
through service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock
into the bumper drive tube with the
spare tire lock key and jack handle.
Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag
E184021
1. Adjust the jack up or down by rotating
the lead screw located on the end of
the jack. The stowage markings should
line up with the bottom channel.
410
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E233626
2. Place the tools inside of the tool bag.
E233625
3. Install the tool bag to the top of the
vehicle jack.
E233624
4. Install the D-ring straps that secure the
tool bag to the vehicle jack.
E270943
5. Install the fuel funnel.
6. Position the jack base so the key hole
slots align with the posts in the floor.
7. With slight downward pressure, slide
the vehicle jack and tool bag inwards
toward the driver side of the vehicle
until it stops.
E233622
8. Secure the strap that holds the vehicle
jack and tool bag to the vehicle.
411
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E233621
9. Install the foam top.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting
surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle
is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm) 1
Bolt Size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
1 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.
412
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
413
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationMeasurement
164Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
.028-.031 in. (0.7 - 0.8 mm)Spark plug gap
10.3:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
E176088
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L V6, DIESEL
SpecificationMeasurement
183Cubic inches
Ultra Low Sulfur DieselRequired Fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
16:1Compression ratio
414
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E249449
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L DURATEC - V6
SpecificationMeasurement
201Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
.049-.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
12:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
E167467
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
415
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationMeasurement
213Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
.030-.033 in. (0.75 - 0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.5:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
E263466
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L MODULAR - V8
SpecificationMeasurement
307Cubic inches
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8Firing order
Coil on plug, coil near plugIgnition system
.049-.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
12:1Compression ratio
416
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E249450
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FL-2062Oil filter.
FT-188Transmission oil filter.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
BAGM-94RH7-800
SP-542Spark plugs.
WW-2247Windshield wiper blade.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
For scheduled maintenance, we
recommend Motorcraft® replacement
parts available at your authorized dealer
or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered
for your vehicle meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty may be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,
use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 560).
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.0L V6, DIESEL
417
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FL-2081Oil filter.
BAGM-49H8-850Battery.
ZD-22Glow plugs.
WW-2247Windshield wiper blade.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
FD-4627Fuel filter kit
For scheduled maintenance, we
recommend Motorcraft® replacement
parts available at your authorized dealer
or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered
for your vehicle meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty may be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,
use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For glow plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 560).
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.3L DURATEC - V6
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FL-500-SOil filter.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
BAGM-94RH7-800
SP-520Spark plugs.
WW-2247Windshield wiper blade.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
418
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
For scheduled maintenance, we
recommend Motorcraft® replacement
parts available at your authorized dealer
or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered
for your vehicle meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty may be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,
use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 560).
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FL-500-SOil filter.
FT-188Transmission oil filter.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
BAGM-94RH7-800
SP-534Spark plugs.
WW-2247Windshield wiper blade.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
For scheduled maintenance, we
recommend Motorcraft® replacement
parts available at your authorized dealer
or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered
for your vehicle meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty may be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,
use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 560).
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 5.0L MODULAR - V8
419
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FL-500-SOil filter.
FT-188Transmission oil filter.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
BAGM-94RH7-800
SP-551Spark plugs.
WW-2247Windshield wiper blade.
FP-79Cabin air filter.
For scheduled maintenance, we
recommend Motorcraft® replacement
parts available at your authorized dealer
or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered
for your vehicle meet or exceed our
specifications. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty may be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,
use an oil filter that meets industry
performance specification
SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 560).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
420
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
421
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80
GTen-speed automatic transmission 10R80
422
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
15.1 qt (14.3 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab)
26.0 gal (98.4 L)Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab)
36.0 gal (136.3 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
29 oz (0.82 kg)A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada)
31 oz (0.88 kg)A/C Refrigerant (Mexico)
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
423
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C949-AAutomatic transmission fluid:
MERCON® ULVMotorcraft MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-12-QULV
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
424
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
425
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Reduced brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
426
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates (If Equipped)
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-A1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP
E240523
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L V6, DIESEL
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
427
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.5 qt (6.15 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
13.7 qt (13 L)Engine coolant.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid.
13.1 qt (12.4 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid.
1.8 qt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive).
2.7 qt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid.
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid.
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly).
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid.
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand).
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
26 gal (98.4 L)Fuel tank.
22.5 qt (21.3 L)Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).
29 oz (0.82 kg)A/C refrigerant.
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C214-B1Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Diesel Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFA
WSS-M2C214-B1Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Diesel Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFA
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
428
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M99C130-ADiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid
PM-27-GAL / PM-27-JUG
WSS-M99C130-ADiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (Canada):
Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid
CPM-27-J
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C949-AAutomatic transmission fluid:
MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-12-QULV
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (U.S.):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
429
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Reduced brake performance.
The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel
engines is important for satisfactory
operation. Determine which oil viscosity
best suits the temperature range you
expect to encounter for the next service
interval from the following SAE viscosity
grade chart.
430
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E258300
The American Petroleum Institute (API)
service symbol is used to identify the
proper engine oil for your engine. The API
service symbol will be displayed on the oil
container you purchase. The API symbol
displays the oil performance category in
the top half of symbol and the viscosity
grade in the center of the symbol.
Note: An engine block heater is
recommended at temperatures below -9°F
(-23°C).
E276509
1. For severe duty service, use SAE
5W-40 API CK-4.
2. For bio-diesel fuel blends (B20 max),
use SAE 5W-40 API CK-4.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L DURATEC - V6
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
431
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
13.6 qt (12.86 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab)
26.0 gal (98.4 L)Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab)
36.0 gal (136.3 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
29 oz (0.82 kg)A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada)
31 oz (0.88 kg)A/C Refrigerant (Mexico)
4.1 fl oz (120 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
432
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C949-AAutomatic transmission fluid:
MERCON® ULVMotorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission
Fluid
XT-12-QULV
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Canada):
433
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
434
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Reduced brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
435
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C947-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP
E240522
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
436
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
15.2 qt (14.35 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab)
26.0 gal (98.4 L)Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab)
36.0 gal (136.3 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
29 oz (0.82 kg)A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada)
31 oz (0.88 kg)A/C Refrigerant (Mexico)
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
437
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C949-AAutomatic transmission fluid:
MERCON® ULVMotorcraft MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-12-QULV
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
438
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-Lock cylinders (Mexico):
439
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Reduced brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-A1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP
440
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L MODULAR - V8
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
8.8 qt (8.3 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
13.9 qt (13.2 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)
5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid
13.1 qt (12.4 L)Automatic transmission fluid
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-
Fly)
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid
Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on
demand)
441
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab)
26.0 gal (98.4 L)Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab)
36.0 gal (136.3 L)Fuel tank
(Optional)
29 oz (0.82 kg)A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada)
31 oz (0.88 kg)A/C Refrigerant (Mexico)
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1Recommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
442
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid
Gear Lubricant
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C949-AAutomatic transmission fluid:
MERCON® ULVMotorcraft MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-12-QULV
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
443
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Reduced brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
444
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C947-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP
445
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240522
446
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
•AM: 530-1710 kHz
•FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in the
vehicle’s CD player.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
447
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
•MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
•MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
Note: Some features, such as satellite
radio, may not be available in your location.
Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Your audio system may not have a
CD player.
448
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
E176103
Display screen: Shows audio
information.
A
Number block: In radio mode,
store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then
press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode,
select a track. In phone mode,
enter a phone number.
B
Function buttons: Select
different functions of the audio
system depending on which
mode you are in (such as Radio
mode or CD mode).
C
OK and cursor arrows: Press
the up and down arrow buttons
to select the various settings.
When you make your selection,
press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set, or press MENU
to exit.
D
TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.
E
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD mode, press to
F
449
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
select the next or previous track.
Press and hold to move quickly
forward or backward through the
current track. In satellite mode,
press to select the next or
previous satellite radio station.
If you select a specific category
(such as jazz, rock or news),
press to find the next or previous
station in the category you
select.
CD slot: Insert a CD.G
Eject: Press to eject a CD.H
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
I
PHONE: Press to access the
phone features.
J
MENU: Press to access different
audio system features. See
Menu Structure.
K
MEDIA Press to open the media
source menu. You can press this
multiple times to change to CD
or scroll through the media
sources using the arrow buttons.
Press OK to select a source.
L
CLOCK Press to access the
clock setting. Use the center
arrow controls to change the
hours and minutes. You can also
set the clock by pressing MENU
and scrolling to Clock Settings.
M
RADIO Press to listen to the
radio or change radio stations.
Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select
different radio functions. Press
and hold to select the autostore
function. Press to return to the
main screen of the active radio
band.
N
MUTE Press to mute the playing
audio.
O
CD Press to listen to a CD. Press
the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen
options of Repeat or Shuffle.
P
SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When
you make your selection, press
Q
the left and right arrow buttons
to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source
independently.
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
450
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Radio
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.
Manual Tune
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
AST
Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
Set Category for Seek/Scan
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
RDS Text Display
Satellite Radio
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You need this number when communicating with
SiriusXM to activate, modify or track your account.
Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel.
Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by
pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Check Channel Guide
Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Set Category for Seek/Scan
Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Alerts
Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock All Stations
Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip No Stations
Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental Lockout
451
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Audio Settings
Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind
noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.
Speed Compensated
Volume
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
Sound
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
Occupancy Mode
Choose between the stereo modes.DSP
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder
Clock Settings
Select to set the time and calendar date.Set Date and Time
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
24 Hour
Display Settings
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp. Setting
452
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/SYNC WITHOUT
TOUCHSCREEN
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
E253670
RADIO: Press to select radio
mode. Press again to display the
available radio sources.
Repeatedly press the button to
scroll through the available radio
sources.
A
Sound settings: Press to
access the sound settings.
Follow the on-screen prompts
to make your selection.
B
Number block: In radio mode,
store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then
press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In phone
mode, enter a phone number.
C
Display: Press to switch the
display on and off.
D
Repeat: Press to repeat the
current media source.
E
Shuffle: Press to shuffle the
current media source.
F
453
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Play/Pause: Press to either
play or pause a track when
listening to a CD.
G
Settings: Press to access the
settings menu. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make your
selection.
H
Apps: Press to access the apps
menu. Follow the on-screen
prompts to make your selection.
See your SYNC information.
I
CLOCK: Press to display the
clock.
J
PHONE: Press to access the
phone features. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make your
selection. See your SYNC
information.
K
Info: Press to access the
information menu. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make your
selection.
L
AUX: Press to access or switch
between devices you plug into
your vehicle.
M
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
454
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
E176105
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
A
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
B
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
Memory presets: Store your
favorite radio stations. To store
a radio station, tune to the
station, then press and hold a
preset button until sound
returns.
C
TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.
D
455
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
MEDIA: Press to access
different audio modes, such as
AM, FM.
E
CD slot: Insert a CD.F
Eject: Press to eject a CD.G
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
•Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
•Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access a station you save if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
456
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
457
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
*http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
458
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
459
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or Siri-
usXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
460
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E205592
Note: The rear console USB ports are for
charging only. See Center Console (page
167).
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
461
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your
portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance
and applications via SYNC AppLink.*
•Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected
phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
•Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
SYNC support is available at your regional
Ford website. See SYNC™
Troubleshooting (page 471).
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
462
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 466).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
Gives you available commands you can use
on the current screen.
Help
Gives you a list of possible voice
commands.
List of Commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by pressing seek
up, seek down, or holding the voice button
for two or more seconds.
Cancel
463
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
•Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Voice Settings
Then either of the following:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
Interaction Mode Standard
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
Interaction Mode Advanced
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
464
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Voice Settings
Then any of the following:
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
Phone Confirmation Off
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
Phone Confirmation On
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Pairing a Phone
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the Settings button.
3. Select Bluetooth from the menu.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
465
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
Pair Phone
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like place a phone call
and access text messages.
When prompted, say a command. See the
following table for example commands.
Voice Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Call ___
Dial ___
Text Messages
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
contact or phone number.
Phone Controls
Use the phone buttons on your steering
wheel to answer, reject, or hang up a call.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Scroll through the menu to view
contacts, text messages, and the
phone dialer.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
•911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
•SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is
compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
466
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist
from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 47). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 320).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press the Settings button then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Select the desired option, on
or off.
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
467
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
468
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the Mobile Apps button to access
the menu on-screen. Then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Scroll through the list ofFind
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
available applications and
select a particular app.
Mobile
Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Applications
SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps.List Applications
Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible
mobile apps.
Find Applications
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.Help
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
•To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
•To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
469
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
•To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
•To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
SYNC supports digital media sources
including: iPod, Bluetooth devices, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports
audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Media Sources
The AUX button allows you to view and
select available media sources.
Press the AUX button to view your
sources. Use the directional arrows and OK
button to select your source. You can also
use the steering wheel audio controls.
Audio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. You can
do things like play a specific song
or album, skip to the next song,
or tune to a radio station. When prompted,
say a command. See the following table
for example commands. Not all
commands may be available on your
vehicle.
Command
___ List of Commands
Help
Pause
Play
Next Track
Previous Track
AM ___
FM ___
CD Player
470
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
Command
Sirius Channel ___
USB
Bluetooth Audio
__ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as an
artist, station, or media source.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use your regional Ford website at any time
to check your phone's compatibility,
register your account and set preferences
as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during
certain hours).
Website(s)Market
www.SYNCMyRide.comNorth America
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.sync-
maroute.ca
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
471
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction. Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
472
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Press the Phone button to
return to the Phone menu.
You are on the Select a
Character screen.
I cannot return to the Phone
menu when selecting a
contact.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
473
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device. The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Switch radio bands and
return to Sirius or switch the
feature off. You can then
change the Sirius station
using the directional
buttons.
Sirius Replay is active.
I cannot change the Sirius
station.
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying. After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
474
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
475
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
476
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
477
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
478
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
E205444
479
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.
HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 527).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside
Temperature
D
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.
480
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E249671
i
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.
Driver Temper-
ature
A
When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.
Heated steering
wheel
B
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.
Passenger
Temperature
C
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.
Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
481
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software
update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays the phone and roaming signal
strength.
Signal StrengthI
This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.
Text MessageJ
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.
911 Assist OffK
This icon displays when a phone call is active.In-CallL
This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.
BluetoothM
Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.
Phone
482
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
Apps
You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 491).
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
•While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
•While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
483
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SEEK PREVIOUS:
•While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
•While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.
M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 83).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
•Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
•VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
•Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
•Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
•SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
•SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
•1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 447).
•DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
•Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 142).
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist
from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
484
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, by visiting:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 47). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 320).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 527).
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
485
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
•For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
•Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
•Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
•All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following table for more specific
examples.
486
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
•Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
SYNC Connect (If Equipped)
With a SYNC® Connect-equipped vehicle,
you can use FordPass® to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel
level and approximate mileage. You can
also schedule specific times to remotely
start your vehicle so it’s ready to hit the
road as soon as you are. SYNC Connect is
an optional feature on select 2017 MY
vehicles. FordPass® is available through
a free download via the Apple App Store®
or Google Play™. Message and data rates
may apply. Services may be limited by
mobile phone network coverage area.
487
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
•FCC: LHJ-FAN
•IC: 2807E-FAN
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.
Please refer to the website for any further
actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 527). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 541).
488
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time.
Software downloads can take place for up
to 30 minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
For Ford:
United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 527). System
489
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access the system
data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order,
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
HOME SCREEN
E205446
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
490
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Home screen displayTileItem
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the compass.
The name of the connected phone appears on the
screen. The status of the phone features also
appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge,
911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging
and roaming.
PhoneB
This map displays your current location or current
route in real time.
Navigation1
C
When you have navigation active, you also see the
next turn and the length of time and distance to
your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the audio information.
1 If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
___ List of Commands
491
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Help
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth
connected device.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
492
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).
Set Temperature ___
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 527).
Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
493
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
494
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.
Find the Nearest
<POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous
Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
495
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app, followed by
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
496
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Call Confirmation On
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Call Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or
turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease
the fan speed to the setting you prefer.
497
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
E242502
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
PresetsC
498
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: Your vehicle may allow you to save
presets from different audio sources on the
same page.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
1
SIRIUS
1
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and descrip-
tion
Menu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
499
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
500
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 527).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 527).
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
501
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Siri-
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 527).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
502
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
503
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
504
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
1 You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
505
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
506
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 524).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
507
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 527).
E206820
508
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Driver temperature: Touch up
or down to adjust the
temperature.
A
Heated steering wheel: Touch
this icon to switch the heated
steering wheel on and off. It
takes about 5 minutes to warm
the steering wheel to 74°F
(23°C) in temperatures as low
B
as -4°F (-22°C). The wheel
maintains an approximate
temperature of 90°F (32°C) and
operates independently from the
heated seats and other
climate-control functions. The
heating element is in between
the leather covering and foam
core to help provide maximum
heat without adversely affecting
the feel of the steering wheel.
Note: This feature only
functions when you switch the
engine on.
Note: The heated steering wheel
may remain on after remote
starting the vehicle, based on
your remote start settings. The
heated steering wheel may also
turn on when you start your
vehicle, if it was on when you
switched your vehicle off.
Note: For steering wheels with
wood trim, the heating feature
will not heat the wheel between
the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
Defrost: A pop up appears on
the screen to display the defrost
options.
C
MAX Defrost: Touch the button
to maximize defrosting. Air flows
through the windshield vents,
the fan automatically adjusts to
the highest speed and the driver
and passenger temperatures are
set to HI. You can use this setting
to defog or clear a thin covering
of ice from the windshield. The
heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you
select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through
the windshield defroster vents
and demister vents.
AUTO: Touch the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Select the desired temperature
using the temperature control.
The system adjusts fan speed,
air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside
air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to
maintain the desired
temperature.
D
Power: Touch the button to
switch the system on and off.
Switching off the climate control
system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.
E
DUAL: This button lights up
when the passenger controls are
active. To switch it off and link
the passenger temperature to
the driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button.
F
Note: the passenger side
temperature and the DUAL
indication automatically turn on
when you or your passenger
adjust the passenger
temperature.
Passenger temperature:
Touch up or down to adjust the
temperature.
G
Fan speed: Touch up or down
to increase or decrease the
volume of air that circulates in
your vehicle.
H
509
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: You cannot adjust the fan
speed when the system is set to
AUTO or MAX A/C.
A/C: A pop-up appears on the
screen to display the air
conditioning options.
I
MAX A/C: Touch the button to
activate and maximize cooling.
The driver and passenger
temperatures are set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning automatically turns
on and the fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even when
you switch the air conditioning
A/C button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to
switch the recirculated air on or
off. When recirculated air is on,
it may reduce the amount of
time needed to cool down the
interior (when used with A/C)
and help reduce odors from
reaching the interior.
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off automatically (or the system
may not allow Recirculated air
to turn on) in all airflow modes
except MAX A/C to reduce risk
of fogging. It may also turn on
and off automatically in Panel
or Panel/Floor airflow modes
during hot weather in order to
improve cooling efficiency.
Manual airflow distribution
controls: Select these controls
individually, together, or with
Defrost to direct the air flow to
the area you desire.
J
Panel: Distributes air through
the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the
demister vents, floor vents and
rear seat floor vents.
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
510
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Dialing a number.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Websites
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
511
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E205447
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent Call
List
A
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
ContactsB
Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
Phone
Settings
C
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Settings (page 527).
512
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays all recent text messages.Text
Messages
D
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone
Keypad
E
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a
call.
Call
Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail.
Calls are rejected if you do not have voicemail set up on your
phone. New text message notifications are not displayed on the
screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not
Disturb
F
Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Note: Certain features are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is moving.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 491). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
513
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. The
system logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
•Signal Strength.
•Battery.
•911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 527).
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
514
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press and hold
the button on the
steering wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Mute
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
•Make calls.
•Send and receive messages.
•Listen to music.
•Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 461).
515
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the
touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple
CarPlay.
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.
2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See
USB Port (page 461).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on
your device.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device. This may
require mobile data usage.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
NAVIGATION
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.
516
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.
You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
E251780
E251779
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
527).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:
517
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
518
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destina-
tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Select this option to remove all previous destinations.Delete
All
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:
Home
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:
Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.Favorites
To add Favorites:
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
bar.
Add a
Favorite
Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.
Search
Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.
Save
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
configuration):
Point of Interest
(POI) Categories
Food
519
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.
See All
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Start
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.
Cancel
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
Start
520
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Highway
Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
521
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 527).Navigation
Settings
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.
Cancel Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:
GoTo return to
your route
press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:
522
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order
for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
SYNC AppLink
The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.
First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to access
additional points of interest (POI). These
points of interest can only be access when
your phone is paired.
Send To Car
You can send destinations to your
navigation system using a computer or
phone using AppLink.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
523
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•Restaurant
•Business center
•Handicap facilities
•Laundry
•Refrigerator
•24 hour room service
•Fitness center
•Internet access
•Pool
•Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 524).
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.
524
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or
favorites.We recommend you do this at
home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
525
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 527).
App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
526
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
527
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.
Speed
Compensated
Vol.
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
such as genre, artist and album.
Gracenote®
Management
528
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Data-
base Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.
Device Informa-
tion
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.Update Media
Index
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone
Update This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
ActionMenu Item
OnBluetooth
Off
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
529
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.
Add a Bluetooth
Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
530
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
Connect
Disconnect
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Press the info icon next to the device name
to see phone and device information.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Auto-Download
Contacts
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
Sort By:
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download
Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ring-
tone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
531
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in
Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.
Roaming
Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
Low Battery
Notification
911 Assist
Enabling 911 Assist
Note: For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and connect
with SYNC3.
To activate 911 Assist from the settings
screen select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can
switch this feature on and off by sliding the scrollbar as follows.
911 Assist
Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature
on.
You can set your contacts in the phone
book for emergency quick dialing.
Setting Emergency Contacts
Ensure the phone book of your cell phone
downloaded to SYNC 3.
From the settings screen select:
532
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature.911 Assist
Select this option as it displays on the screen.Set Emergency
Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this option under <Emergency contact 1>.Select a
Contact
The screen lists contacts in the phone
book. Select the contact that you want to
set as emergency contact. You can set
Emergency Contact 2 by same process.
You can set two Emergency Contacts in
total.
Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an
emergency call, the Emergency Contact
button displays on the touch screen. You
need to press the button to call the contact
through your Bluetooth phone.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
navigation, a map with your current street
information displays on the screen when 911
Assist is in process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Avail-
able)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets
(AST) Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
533
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM
This button is available if SiriusXM is the
active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following
features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that
category.
Set Category for
Seek
Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows
you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental
Lockout
Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an
alert or delete all alerts.
Edit Alerts
You can also view your satellite radio
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this
screen. You need this number when
communicating with SiriusXM to activate,
modify or track your account.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Prefer-
ences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
3D City Model
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
Breadcrumbs
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon is displayed on the map regardless of this setting.
POI Icons
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.
Incident Map
Icons
534
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Prefer-
ences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
Always Use ___
Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Use HOV Lanes
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.
Automatically
Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Eco Time
Penalty
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Dynamic Route
Guidance
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Pref-
erences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance
Prompts
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only
535
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Source Selection
The screen lists available alternative
navigation sources using Applink.
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.
The connected devices send data to us in
the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place.
Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible
with the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. We are
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
OnMobile Apps
Off Disabling mobile apps in the
settings menu disables auto-
matic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
Update Mobile
Apps
There are three possible statuses:
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive
an update.
No update is
required.
The system has
detected a new app
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
536
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.
Note: We is not responsible or liable for any
damages or loss of privacy relating to usage
of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle
data that you approve us to provide to an
app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.
Menu Item
Select to have the touch-
screen display in English,
Spanish or French.
Language
Select to display units in
kilometers or miles.
Distance
Select to display units in
Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Temperature
Select to have the system
beep to confirm choices
made through the touch-
screen.
Touch Screen Beep
When you activate this
option, the system auto-
matically updates when
you have an available
Internet connection
through a Wi-Fi network or
mobile connection.
Automatic System Updates
537
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Information pertaining to
the system and its soft-
ware.
About SYNC
Documentation of the
software license for the
system.
Software Licenses
Select to restore factory
defaults. This erases all
personal settings and
personal data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi & Hotspot (If Equipped)
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
System Wi-Fi
You can access the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.Available
Networks Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Wi-Fi Available
Notifications
Vehicle Hotspot
You can access the following:
538
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.Wi-Fi Hotspot
On/Off
Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.
Settings
Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.Data Usage
Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.Manage Devices
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.
Note: It is the account owner’s
responsibility to remove the vehicle from
the vehicle network carrier account when
ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier for more
information.
Note: Data, such as the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID,
and data plan usage, is shared between us
and the vehicle network carrier to provide
the Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance
with your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability, and may be used
to enable a seamless transition from an old
to new embedded modem and to confirm
any updates are successfully delivered.
Note: For your convenience data usage may
be available for monitoring under Settings
but may not reflect actual or current usage.
The vehicle network carrier is responsible
for providing information about your
account. Please contact the vehicle network
carrier for more information.
Note: We may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle, including
security updates and bug fixes, to keep
connected services current, like Vehicle
Hotspot, without prior notice to you.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
these features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.
539
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera
Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner's manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen
to switch it back on.
Display Off
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Auto
The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Night
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Auto Dim
540
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice Control You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove
additional voice prompts
and confirmations.
Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have
the system confirm a
contact's name with you
before making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have
the system display a list of
available voice commands
when you press the voice.
Voice Command List
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode, a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.
For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
LincolnFord
United States: 1-
800-521-4140
United States and
Canada: 1-800-
392-3673 Canada: 1-800-
387-9333
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.
541
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.
The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.
There is back-
ground noise
during a phone
call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person
but they cannot
hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to
be restarted.
During a call, I
cannot hear the
other person
and they cannot
hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not
able to down-
load my phone-
book.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Limitations on your cell
phone's capability.
The system
says "Phone-
book down-
loaded" but my
SYNC 3 phone-
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
542
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
iPhone •Go to your cell phone's Settings.
•Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
•Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
•Turn Show Notifications on.
•Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
543
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
This is a cell phone limita-
tion.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunc-
tion.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
your vehicle during very hot or cold
temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
my device when
I start my
vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.
This is a device-
dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio
does not
stream.
544
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
The device is not
connected.
Try switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
The device is in a bad
state.
Make sure that all song details are popu-
lated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
music that is on
my device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.
The file may be
corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
The song may have
copyright protection that
does not allow it to play.
Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 498).
The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.
Update media index. See Settings (page
527).
The device needs to be
re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect
my device, I
sometimes do
not hear any
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
select AirPlay from the devices Control
Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Connect a compatible device or media
player.
The device or media
player is incompatible.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
song informa-
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.
545
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connec-
tion. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.
Multiple Access points
within range with the
same SSID.
Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
with the front of the vehicle facing the
hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interfer-
ence.
Weak signal probably
due to distance from the
hotspot, obstruction or
high interference.
Disconnecting
after successful
connection.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated
windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not facing the
hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
There may be an
obstruction between
SYNC 3 and the hotspot.
Poor signal seen
by SYNC 3
despite being
near a hotspot.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
Please set the network to visible and try
again.
The hotspot was defined
as a hidden network.
A hotspot is not
listed in the list
of available
networks.
546
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
hotspot.
SYNC 3 does not
currently provide a
hotspot.
SYNC 3 is not
seen when
searching for
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.
Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excel-
lent, test with another high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more
predictable.
Poor signal strength, too
far from the hotspot,
hotspot is supporting
multiple connections,
slow Internet connection
or other problems.
Software down-
load takes too
long.
Test the connection with another device, if
the hotspot requires a subscription, you
may contact the service provider.
It is possible that there is
no new software. The
connected hotspot may
be a managed one and it
requires either a
subscription or agreeing
to the terms and condi-
tions.
SYNC 3 seems
to connect with
a hotspot and
the signal
strength is
excellent but
the software is
not being
updated.
547
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a compatible smart-
phone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
iPhone users must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB cable.
You did not connect an
Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
"Find Mobile
Apps," SYNC 3
does not find
any applica-
tions.
Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
is running on your phone. Some apps
require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps
are not installed and
running on your mobile
device.
My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
Sometimes apps do not
properly close and re-
open their connection to
SYNC 3, over ignition
cycles, for example.
My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I
still cannot find
any apps. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.
548
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-
connect to your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions
of the Android operating
system that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle
drive to not be found
again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
and restart it.
You may need to reset
the USB connection to
SYNC 3.
My iPhone is
connected, my
app is running, I
restarted the
app but I still
cannot find it on
SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
device by using the device's volume control
buttons which are most often found on the
side of the device.
The Bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an
Android phone.
I found and
started my
media app on
SYNC 3, but
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
app's settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices
have a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that
apps can use to connect.
If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than
the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps
Menu.
549
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
what I am
saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.
Review the media voice commands at the
beginning of the media section.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
the name of a
song or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The contact name may
contain special charac-
ters.
550
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-
speech voice prompt
technology.
The system
generates voice
prompts and
the pronunci-
ation of some
words may not
be accurate for
my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
551
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Personal Profiles have not been set up.
I cannot create a profile.
An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
I cannot link a keyfob.
The keyfob selected was already associ-
ated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.
A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.
My personalized settings do not save. A different Personal Profile is active than
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.
552
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
The keyfob being used is not linked to a
profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
Personal Profiles is turned off.My preset positions recall but my profile
does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not. The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
I lost a keyfob.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
a new keyfob to replace lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.
553
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support
the currently selected
language for the instru-
ment cluster and inform-
ation and entertainment
display.
The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3 SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
554
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest
benefit:
•24 months, unlimited mileage.
•The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
•Bed rails.
•Chrome exhaust tips.
•Custom graphics*.
•Door sills*.
•Fender flares*.
•Fog lamps*.
•Hood deflector.
•Running boards.
•Side window deflectors*.
•Splash guards.
•Tailgate dampener.
•Tow hooks.
•Trailer tow mirrors.
•Trim kits.
Interior Style
•Ambient lighting.
•Floor mats.
•Premium floor liners.
Lifestyle
•Audio upgrade*.
•Bed divider.
•Bed extender.
•Bed lighting.
•Bedliners and bedmats.
•Bed ramps.
•Bed side step.
•Ford Telematics™*.
•Hitch balls and towbars.
•Interior cargo organization and
management.
•In-vehicle safe*.
•Racks and carriers*.
•Rear-seat entertainment*.
•Smoker's package.
•Sportliner cargo liner*.
•Tablet cradle*
•Tonneau/Bed cover*.
•Trailer brake controller.
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
•Truck bed camping tent*.
•Truck bed cargo organization and
management.
•Wireless charging*.
555
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Accessories
Peace of Mind
•Back-up alarm*.
•Bed hooks*.
•Bumper and hitch-mounted parking
sensors*.
•Keyless entry keypad.
•Protective seat covers*.
•Remote start.
•Roadside assistance kits.
•Tool or cargo boxes*.
•Vehicle security systems.
•Wheel locks.
•Wheel well liners.
Footnote
*Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor
Company engineering requirements.
Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty
from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
556
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Accessories
•Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
not design them specifically for
automotive use.
•If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability,
and may adversely affect the
performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
557
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
•Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
•Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
558
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
•Windshield wiper blades.
•Spark plugs.
•The clutch disc (if equipped).
•Brake pads and linings.
•Shock absorbers.
•Struts.
•Engine Belts.
•Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
•Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
•Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
•Rental reimbursement.
•Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
•Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
•Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Protect extended
service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
559
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 414).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
560
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 352).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.
You can drive high performance vehicles
in such a way that may lead to higher oil
consumption this includes extended time
at high engine speeds, high loads, engine
braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track
and off-road usage. Under these
conditions, oil consumption of
approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter
per 800 km) is possible. As a result, you
need to check the engine oil level at every
refueling and adjust to maintain proper
levels to avoid engine damage.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
561
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Air filter restriction gauge.
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display.
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
562
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt or belts
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires including the spare for wear and
proper pressure2
Fluid levels1; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Diesel Engines
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
563
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
564
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1
Change engine oil and filter.2
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary.
1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 352).
Other Maintenance Items 1
Replace cabin air filter.
Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace engine air filter.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
565
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items 1
Change engine coolant. 2
At 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2 Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or
50,000 mi (80,000 km).
3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
•Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
•Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform
the engine air filter replacement.
566
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs. (Gasoline Engine).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter. (Gasoline Engine).Inspect frequently, service
as required Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary (Diesel Engine).
Replace spark plugs. (Gasoline Engine).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Replace engine air filter. (Gasoline engine).Inspect frequently, service
as required Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary (Diesel Engine).
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
1Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
567
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road Operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate
if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter. (Gasoline engine).
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary (Diesel Engine).
Change engine oil and filter.1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
1Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel. (Gasoline Engine).
Every oil change interval
Diesel Engine
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
568
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or six months,
600 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion
inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Frequent or Extended Idling (Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving) or Frequent
Low-speed Operation if your Vehicle is Used for Stationary Operation
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion
inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
569
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Frequent Low-speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or
Long Rush-hour Traffic
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion
inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Maximum Loaded Weight
for Vehicle Operation)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra-
tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion
inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or 1200 engine
hours
Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km) or 2400
engine hours
Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine
hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter.
570
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Rotate the tires1, inspect the tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km)
Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary.
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Change the engine oil and filter.2
Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km),
six months or 300 engine
hours Inspect and lubricate the U-joints.
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), 6 months or
600 engine hours
Replace the air inlet foam filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
2Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
571
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road Operation
Inspect functional holes in exhaust tip to make sure they
are clean and clear of debris or foreign materials. Refer to
the Vehicle Care chapter of your owner’s manual for more
information. (Diesel Engine).
As required
Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods.
Lubricate any grease fittings.
Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km),
six months or 300 engine
hours Inspect the brake system pads and rotors.
Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if
necessary.
Change the engine oil and filter.1
Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km)
or 300 engine hours
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
600 engine hours
Replace the air inlet foam filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Using Biodiesel, up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20)
Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the
information display, and perform the services listed in the
scheduled maintenance chart.
As required
Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel
filters.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km), six months or
300 engine hours
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case (Four-wheel
drive vehicles) fluid changes or level
checks are not required unless a leak is
suspected or the assembly has been
submerged in water. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
572
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
Diesel Particulate Filter
Over time, a slight amount of ash builds
up in the diesel particulate filter, which is
not removed during the regeneration
process. The filter may need to be replaced
with a new or remanufactured part at
approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km).
Actual mileage varies depending on engine
and vehicle operating conditions.
In this case, the engine control system sets
a service light (wrench icon) to inform you
to bring your vehicle to the dealer for
service. If there are any issues with the
oxidation catalyst or particulate filter
system, a service light (wrench or engine
icon) sets by the engine control system to
inform you to bring your vehicle into a
dealer for service.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
573
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
574
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
575
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
576
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
577
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
578
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
579
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
580
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
581
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
582
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
583
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes
and brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.
Car
E239120
584
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
585
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
•With the ignition ON.
•With the engine running.
•During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
•You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
586
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
•Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
•Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
587
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
•Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
•Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
•Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
588
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
589
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
•Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
•Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
•Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
•Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
•Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
•Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
•Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
•Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
•Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
•Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
590
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
•You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
•When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
591
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
592
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
•I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
•ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
•iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
593
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
594
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
•Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
•(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
595
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
•TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
•Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
•TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
596
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
•You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
597
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
598
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
599
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
600
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
601
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argen-
tina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
602
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
603
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
604
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
605
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
606
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
607
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
608
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
609
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
610
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
611
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s)
E207816
Argentina
E197509
Brazil
E207818
European Union EU
E253824
Ghana
E253823
Jordan
E253822
Malaysia
E253812
E253813
Mexico
E197811
612
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Moldova
E207821
Morocco
E253817
Oman
E198001
Philippines
E253816
Russia
E197844
Serbia
E253820
Singapore
E198002
South Africa
E253819
South Korea
613
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
E203679
Taiwan
E253818
Ukraine
E207817
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Mid Range Radar
E269659
Argentina
E269662
Ghana
E269660
Jordan
614
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
E269661
Morocco
E269664
South Africa
E269663
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Passive Anti-Theft
System
E274065
Argentina
E269675
Brazil
E274068
Djibouti
615
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
E269674
Ghana
E274067
Jamaica
E269666
Jordan
E269673
Malaysia
E269670
Morocco
E274066
Paraguay
616
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
E275754
Pakistan
E269672
Serbia
E269676
Singapore
E269667
South Africa
E269671
Ukraine
E269668
United Arab Emirates
617
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
E269677
Vietnam
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Radio Transceiver
Module
E272192
Djibouti
E272193
Jamaica
E272194
Jordan
E269683
Morocco
E269684
Pakistan
618
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
E272195
Paraguay
E269681
Serbia
E269685
South Africa
E269682
Ukraine
E272196
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Blind Spot Information
System
E269695
Ghana
619
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
E269697
Malaysia
E269696
South Africa
E269694
United Arab Emirates
E269693
Vietnam
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Wireless Charging
E272903
United Arab Emirates
E273475
South Korea
620
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for SYNC 3
E252722
Brazil
621
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
622
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
3
360 Degree Camera...................................240
Camera Views......................................................241
Front Camera.......................................................241
Side Camera........................................................242
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................212
A
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................142
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................222
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................222
Accessories....................................................555
Exterior Style.......................................................555
Interior Style........................................................555
Lifestyle.................................................................555
Peace of Mind.....................................................556
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............244
Active Park Assist........................................233
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space.................................................................235
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature.........236
Troubleshooting the System.........................236
Using Active Park Assist..................................234
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................362
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................363
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................362
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................87
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................83
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................83
End of Travel Position........................................84
Airbag Disposal...............................................54
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control.........................................142
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Diesel................................................................369
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Gasoline...........................................................369
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................80
Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................80
Arming the Alarm................................................80
Disarming the Alarm..........................................80
Using the System.................................................80
Appendices....................................................584
Apps..................................................................524
..................................................................................524
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................526
At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............111
Airbag Secondary Warning...............................111
Beltminder Warning.............................................111
Door Ajar Warning................................................111
Headlamps On Warning.....................................111
Key in Ignition Warning.......................................111
Keyless Warning Alert.........................................111
Parking Brake On Warning.................................111
Rear Park Aid Warning........................................111
Service AdvanceTrac Warning.........................111
Audio Control..................................................84
Media........................................................................85
Seek, Next or Previous.......................................85
Audio System................................................447
General Information.........................................447
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Touchscreen Display...............................454
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD..................................................................448
Menu Structure..................................................450
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
SYNC Without Touchscreen................453
Autolamps.........................................................91
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps.........................................................91
623
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Automatic Climate Control.......................143
Automatic High Beam Control..................92
Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................93
Switching the System On and Off.................93
Automatic Transmission..........................206
Brake-Shift Interlock........................................209
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow....................................................................211
Understanding the Shift Positions of your
Automatic Transmission...........................206
Understanding your SelectShift™
Automatic Transmission...........................208
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................357
Auto-Start-Stop...........................................180
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................181
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................180
Autowipers.......................................................88
Auxiliary Power Points................................165
110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power
Outlet.................................................................165
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................165
Locations...............................................................165
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................359
Bed Access.....................................................275
Box Side Step......................................................275
Bed Extender....................................................75
Grocery Mode.........................................................76
Tailgate Mode........................................................75
Bed Ramps.....................................................276
Installing the Ramp Holder............................278
Stowing the Bed Ramp....................................277
Using the Bed Ramp.........................................276
Blind Spot Information System.............256
Blind Spot Information System with Trailer
Tow.....................................................................257
Switching the System On and Off..............260
System Errors.....................................................260
Using the Blind Spot Information
System..............................................................256
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..........256
Body Styling Kits.........................................380
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........344
Booster Seats...................................................31
Types of Booster Seats......................................32
Brake Fluid Check........................................358
Brakes...............................................................222
General Information..........................................222
Breaking-In......................................................313
Bulb Specification Chart...........................367
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................148
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................423
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................427
Specifications.....................................................424
Capacities and Specifications - 3.0L V6,
Diesel.............................................................427
Specifications.....................................................428
Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L
Duratec - V6................................................431
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................436
Specifications.....................................................433
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................436
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates..........................................................440
Specifications.....................................................438
Capacities and Specifications - 5.0L
Modular - V8...............................................441
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................445
Specifications.....................................................442
Capacities and Specifications.................414
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................372
Catalytic Converter......................................194
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................195
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................195
Center Console..............................................167
Changing a Bulb...........................................363
Accessing the Halogen High Beam, Low
Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs.................................................................364
624
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator
and Reverse Lamp Bulbs..........................366
Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-mount
Brake Lamp Bulbs........................................366
Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror Direction
Indicator Lamp Bulbs..................................367
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs............................365
Replacing LED Brake, Rear, Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp
Bulbs.................................................................366
Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot Lamp and
High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs...............367
Replacing LED Direction Indicator and Side
Marker Bulbs..................................................366
Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs.................366
Replacing Side Marker Bulb..........................365
Replacing the Halogen High Beam, Low
Beam and Direction Indicator
Bulbs.................................................................364
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb....................................................................367
Changing a Fuse...........................................342
Fuses......................................................................342
Changing a Road Wheel..........................404
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................404
Jacking the Vehicle...........................................408
Remove the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag....................................................................406
Removing the Spare Tire................................407
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire......................410
Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool
Bag......................................................................410
Tire Change Procedure...................................405
Changing the 12V Battery.........................359
Battery Management System........................361
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Diesel............................................................369
Air Filter Restriction Gauge............................370
Changing the Engine Air Filter -
Gasoline.......................................................369
Changing the Wiper Blades......................361
Checking MyKey System Status..............64
Checking the Wiper Blades......................361
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................44
Child Restraint Positioning.........................33
Child Safety.......................................................18
General Information.............................................18
Child Safety Locks.........................................35
Left-Hand Side......................................................35
Right-Hand Side...................................................35
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................377
With King Ranch Edition..................................377
Without King Ranch Edition...........................377
Cleaning Products........................................372
Materials................................................................372
Cleaning the Engine....................................374
Cleaning the Exhaust..................................374
Cleaning the Exterior...................................372
Cleaning the Headlamps................................373
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................373
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................373
Stripes or Graphics............................................373
Underbody............................................................373
Under Hood..........................................................373
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................376
Cleaning the Interior....................................375
Cleaning the Wheels..................................378
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................375
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................64
Climate...........................................................508
Climate Control.............................................142
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................353
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......54
Creating a MyKey............................................63
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................63
Cross Traffic Alert........................................260
Blocked Sensors.................................................262
Switching the System Off and On..............262
System Errors......................................................262
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................262
System Limitations...........................................262
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System.........260
Cruise Control..................................................85
Principle of Operation......................................243
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................243
Customer Assistance..................................327
625
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................92
Type One - Conventional
(Non-Configurable).......................................92
Type Two - Configurable...................................92
Diesel Particulate Filter.............................200
Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel
Particulate Filter System............................201
Regeneration......................................................200
Digital Radio..................................................456
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................457
Direction Indicators.......................................94
Doors and Locks.............................................67
Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap................................................................358
Drive Control.................................................268
Selectable Drive Modes..................................268
Driver Alert.......................................................251
Using Driver Alert................................................251
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................48
Children and Airbags..........................................49
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.......................................................48
Driving Aids.....................................................251
Driving Hints....................................................313
Driving Through Water................................315
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................92
E
Economical Driving......................................313
Electric Parking Brake.................................223
Applying the Electric Parking Brake............223
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake..................................................224
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake..................................................................223
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge...............................................................224
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............584
Electronic Locking Differential...............220
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential......................................................220
Operating ELD With a Spare or Mismatched
Tires.....................................................................221
Electronic Tailgate..........................................72
With the Outside Control Button....................72
With the Remote Control...................................72
Emission Law.................................................193
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance..........194
Tampering With a Noise Control
System...............................................................193
End User License Agreement.................586
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................586
Engine Block Heater.....................................178
Using the Engine Block Heater......................179
Engine Coolant Check................................353
Adding Coolant...................................................353
Coolant Change.................................................355
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................356
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................355
Recycled Coolant...............................................355
Severe Climates.................................................355
Engine Emission Control............................193
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................77
Engine Oil Check - Diesel...........................351
Adding Engine Oil...............................................351
Engine Oil Check - Gasoline....................350
Adding Engine Oil..............................................350
Engine Oil Dipstick - Diesel......................350
Engine Oil Dipstick - Gasoline................349
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™..................................................414
Drivebelt Routing................................................414
Engine Specifications - 3.0L V6,
Diesel.............................................................414
Drivebelt Routing................................................415
Engine Specifications - 3.3L Duratec -
V6....................................................................415
Drivebelt Routing................................................415
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................415
Drivebelt Routing................................................416
626
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Engine Specifications - 5.0L Modular -
V8....................................................................416
Drivebelt Routing................................................417
Entertainment..............................................498
AM/FM Radio......................................................499
Apps........................................................................507
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................506
CD (If equipped)................................................505
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)........................................................502
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................500
Sources.................................................................499
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................507
USB Ports.............................................................507
Environment......................................................15
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake.............................223
Essential Towing Checks..........................303
Before Towing a Trailer...................................309
Hitches..................................................................304
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller..............305
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).......................................309
Safety Chains......................................................305
Trailer Brakes.......................................................305
Trailer Lamps......................................................308
Trailer Towing Connector...............................303
Using a Step Bumper.......................................308
When Towing a Trailer.....................................309
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options.................................14
Exterior Mirrors................................................98
360-Degree Camera........................................100
Auto-dimming Feature....................................100
Blind Spot Information System.....................101
Clearance Lamps ..............................................100
Direction Indicator Mirrors .............................100
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................98
Heated Exterior Mirrors ...................................100
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror..........................100
Memory Mirrors ..................................................100
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................98
Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................99
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping
Mirrors.................................................................99
Puddle Lamps.....................................................100
Spot Lamps.........................................................100
Telescoping Mirrors.............................................99
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................37
Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................38
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................40
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................39
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................38
Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue
(Front Center Seat)........................................37
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404
Floor Mats.......................................................316
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................93
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................87
Ford Credit..........................................................11
US Only......................................................................11
Ford Protect..................................................558
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................559
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................558
Four-Wheel Drive..........................................212
Front Fog Lamps............................................93
Front Passenger Sensing System............49
Front Seat Armrest......................................159
Fuel and Refueling.......................................183
Fuel Consumption........................................192
Advertised Capacity..........................................192
Fuel Economy......................................................192
Fuel Filler Funnel Location - Regular
Cab.................................................................188
Fuel Filler Funnel Location - SuperCab/
SuperCrew...................................................188
Fuel Filter - Diesel........................................359
Fuel Filter - Gasoline..................................359
Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................183
Biodiesel................................................................184
Diesel Fuel Additives ........................................185
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required .........184
627
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right
Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United
States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin
Islands And Other Locales) ......................183
Fuel Quality - E85........................................186
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles.............................................................186
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline.............................................................187
Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................187
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................187
Fuel Shutoff....................................................321
Fuses................................................................334
Fuse Specification Chart..........................334
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel.................................................................340
Power Distribution Box....................................334
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............161
Gauges.............................................................104
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge..............106
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........106
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge.............................105
Fuel Gauge............................................................106
Information Display...........................................106
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge................................................................106
Turbo Boost Gauge...........................................106
Type 1 and 2..........................................................104
Type 3.....................................................................105
Gearbox
See: Transmission.............................................206
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................55
Intelligent Access.................................................55
General Maintenance Information.......560
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................562
Owner Checks and Services...........................561
Protecting Your Investment..........................560
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................560
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?....................................................560
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................330
Getting the Services You Need...............327
Away From Home..............................................327
H
Hazard Flashers.............................................321
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................362
Headrest
See: Head Restraints........................................150
Head Restraints............................................150
Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................151
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................148
Heated Rear Window..................................148
Heated Seats..................................................157
Rear Heated Seats.............................................158
Heated Steering Wheel...............................86
Heated Windshield......................................148
Windshield Wiper De-Icer...............................148
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................142
Hill Descent Control...................................230
Principle of Operation......................................230
Hill Start Assist.............................................224
Switching the System On and Off...............225
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................225
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................145
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................147
General Hints.......................................................145
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................147
Quickly Heating the Interior............................146
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........147
Recommended Settings for Heating..........146
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................222
Home Screen................................................490
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........344
I
Ignition Switch...............................................169
In California (U.S. Only)............................328
Information Display Control......................86
Information Displays.....................................112
General Information............................................112
628
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Information Messages................................124
4WD........................................................................140
Active Park.............................................................125
Adaptive Cruise Control...................................125
AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............126
Airbag......................................................................126
Alarm and Security............................................126
Battery and Charging System.........................127
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................127
Diesel Messages..................................................128
Doors and Locks...................................................131
Driver Alert..............................................................131
Drivetrain.................................................................131
Engine......................................................................132
Fuel...........................................................................132
Keys and Intelligent Access............................132
Lane Keeping System........................................133
Maintenance.........................................................133
MyKey......................................................................134
Off Road.................................................................135
Park Aid..................................................................135
Park Brake.............................................................136
Power Steering....................................................136
Pre-Collision Assist............................................137
Pro Trailer Backup Assist..................................137
Remote Start........................................................138
Seats.......................................................................138
Side-Wind.............................................................138
Starting System .................................................139
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................139
Trailer.......................................................................139
Installing Child Restraints............................19
Child Seats...............................................................19
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats....................................................................28
Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Regular Cab)...................................................29
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew
Cab and Super Cab)......................................30
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outermost Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use) ....................................................28
Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear Seat
Outermost Positions)....................................24
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front
Center Position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab).....................................................................20
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center
Position of Super Cab and Crew
Cab)......................................................................22
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................27
Using Tether Straps.............................................28
Instrument Cluster.......................................104
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................91
Instrument Panel Overview........................16
Interior Lamps.................................................95
Front Interior Lamps...........................................95
Rear Interior Lamps............................................96
Interior Mirror...................................................101
Automatic Dimming Mirror..............................101
Manual Dimming Mirror....................................101
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................322
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................322
Jump Starting......................................................323
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................322
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................323
K
Keyless Entry....................................................70
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
(if Equipped).....................................................70
Keyless Starting.............................................170
Ignition Modes.....................................................170
Keys and Remote Controls.........................55
L
Lane Keeping System.................................252
Switching the System On and Off...............253
System Display...................................................254
System Settings.................................................253
Troubleshooting.................................................255
Lighting Control..............................................90
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam...............91
Headlamp High Beam.......................................90
629
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Lighting..............................................................90
General Information...........................................90
Load Carrying................................................270
Load Limit........................................................271
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................275
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................271
Load Retaining Fixtures.............................270
BoxLink™ Cleats................................................270
Locking and Unlocking.................................67
Activating Intelligent Access............................67
Autolock..................................................................69
Battery Saver.........................................................70
Illuminated Entry..................................................69
Power Door Locks.................................................67
Remote Control.....................................................67
Smart Unlock........................................................68
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................68
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404
M
Maintenance.................................................344
General Information.........................................344
Manual Climate Control.............................142
Manual Seats.................................................152
Manual Lumbar ..................................................153
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................152
Recline Adjustment...........................................153
Manual Tailgate...............................................72
Memory Function.........................................156
Easy Entry and Exit Feature.............................157
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key.............156
Saving a PreSet Position.................................156
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................112
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors................................97
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof.........................................................102
Bounce-Back.......................................................103
Opening and Closing the Moonroof............103
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™.......417
Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L V6, Diesel..........417
Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L Duratec -
V6....................................................................418
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................419
Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L Modular -
V8....................................................................419
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................65
MyKey™.............................................................62
Principle of Operation........................................62
N
Navigation.......................................................516
cityseeker..............................................................523
Destination Mode...............................................518
Map Mode.............................................................516
Navigation Map Updates................................524
Navigation Menu.................................................521
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................524
SYNC AppLink.....................................................523
Waypoints.............................................................522
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........563
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................563
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................565
O
Off-Road Driving...........................................314
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques..............314
Crossing Obstacles............................................315
Hill Climbing.........................................................315
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................352
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check - Diesel.......................351
See: Engine Oil Check - Gasoline................350
Opening and Closing the Hood..............344
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................332
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........332
Overhead Console.......................................168
P
Parking Aids...................................................232
Principle of Operation......................................232
630
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................77
SecuriLock™...........................................................77
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................77
Pedals.................................................................87
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™.........................46
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................46
Phone...............................................................510
During a Phone Call...........................................514
Making Calls.........................................................513
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................510
Phone Menu...........................................................511
Receiving Calls.....................................................514
Smartphone Connectivity...............................515
Text Messaging....................................................515
Post-Crash Alert System..........................324
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................67
Power Running Boards.................................81
Power Seats....................................................153
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................154
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats
With Active Motion ......................................154
Power Steering Fluid Check....................358
Power Windows..............................................97
Accessory Delay...................................................98
Bounce-Back..........................................................97
One-Touch Up or Down.....................................97
Window Lock.........................................................98
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................264
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings............................................................266
Blocked Sensors................................................266
Distance Indication and Alert.......................265
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System..............................................................264
Protecting the Environment........................15
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404
R
Rear Axle.........................................................220
Rear Parking Aid...........................................232
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................233
Rear Seat Armrest.......................................160
Rear Seats........................................................157
Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ...............157
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position..............................................................157
Rear View Camera.......................................237
Camera guidelines............................................238
Manual Zoom.....................................................240
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................239
Rear Camera Delay...........................................240
Using the Rear View Camera System........238
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................237
Recommended Towing Weights............291
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle..............................303
Refueling.........................................................189
Refueling System Overview...........................189
Refueling System Warning..............................191
Refueling Your Vehicle.....................................190
Remote Control..............................................55
Car Finder................................................................59
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................55
Intelligent Access Key.........................................56
Remote Start.........................................................60
Replacing the Battery.........................................57
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................59
Remote Start.................................................148
Automatic Settings............................................149
Removing the Tailgate..................................73
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............378
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................61
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................332
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................332
Roadside Assistance..................................320
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................321
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage..................321
631
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................321
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................320
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................320
Roadside Emergencies..............................320
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................313
Running Out of Fuel....................................188
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................188
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................188
S
Safety Canopy™.............................................52
Safety Precautions......................................183
Satellite Radio..............................................458
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................459
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............459
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................459
Troubleshooting................................................460
Scheduled Maintenance Record............573
Scheduled Maintenance..........................560
Seatbelt Extension........................................44
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.......................41
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................42
Belt-Minder™........................................................42
Seatbelts...........................................................36
Principle of Operation........................................36
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime...............................................................41
Conditions of operation.....................................42
Seats.................................................................150
Security...............................................................77
Selective Catalytic Reductant
System..........................................................196
Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or
Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction
System.............................................................200
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and
Information......................................................199
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level..............................196
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages
and Vehicle Operations...............................198
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank..........196
Settings............................................................527
911 Assist...............................................................532
Ambient Lighting...............................................539
Bluetooth..............................................................529
Clock.......................................................................529
Display...................................................................540
General...................................................................537
Media Player........................................................528
Mobile Apps.........................................................536
Navigation............................................................534
Phone.....................................................................529
Radio......................................................................533
SiriusXM................................................................534
Sound.....................................................................527
Valet Mode............................................................541
Vehicle...................................................................539
Voice Control........................................................541
Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................538
Side Airbags......................................................51
Sitting in the Correct Position..................150
Sliding Windows...........................................102
Power Sliding Back Window..........................102
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................397
Snowplowing..................................................317
Engine Temperature while Plowing.............318
Installing the Snowplow...................................317
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow
Attached...........................................................318
Outside Air Temperature While
Plowing..............................................................319
Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped
Vehicle...............................................................318
Snowplow Mode.................................................317
Transmission Operation while
Plowing..............................................................319
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Using a Slide-In Camper.....................................13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................566
Diesel Engine......................................................568
Exceptions............................................................572
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................243
632
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Spot Lamps.....................................................94
Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps..................94
Stability Control............................................227
Principle of Operation.......................................227
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................169
Starting a Diesel Engine.............................174
....................................................................................174
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................175
Cold Weather Operation..................................176
Cold Weather Starting.......................................175
Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug
System...............................................................175
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................174
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................171
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................173
Failure to Start......................................................172
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................174
Important Ventilating Information...............174
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................173
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................173
Vehicles with an Ignition Key...........................171
Vehicles with Keyless Start..............................171
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........169
General Information..........................................169
Steering...........................................................263
Electric Power Steering...................................263
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With:
Push Button Start......................................170
Unlocking the Steering Wheel.........................171
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without:
Push Button Start......................................170
Steering Wheel...............................................83
Storage Compartments.............................167
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.....................................................102
Sun Visors........................................................102
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.................................102
Supplementary Restraints System..........47
Principle of Operation.........................................47
Switching Off the Engine...........................178
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3........................................................479
General Information.........................................479
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.......................541
SYNC™ Applications and
Services.......................................................466
911 Assist...............................................................467
SYNC Mobile Apps...........................................468
SYNC™...........................................................462
General Information.........................................462
SYNC™ Troubleshooting...........................471
T
Tailgate Lock.....................................................72
Tailgate Step....................................................74
Closing the Step....................................................75
Opening the Step.................................................74
Tailgate...............................................................72
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............414
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................329
Tire Care..........................................................383
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................384
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................383
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................385
Temperature A B C............................................384
Traction AA A B C..............................................384
Treadwear............................................................383
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........398
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................399
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System .....................................400
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................381
Towing a Trailer.............................................279
Load Placement................................................280
Towing Points................................................325
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels..........................................................310
Emergency Towing.............................................310
Recreational Towing..........................................310
Towing..............................................................279
Traction Control...........................................226
Principle of Operation......................................226
Trailer Reversing Aids..................................281
Principle of Operation.......................................281
Pro Trailer Backup Assist™.............................281
633
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist..........281
Troubleshooting.................................................286
Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist...................285
Trailer Sway Control....................................291
Transfer Case Fluid Check........................357
Transmission Code Designation............422
Transmission.................................................206
Transporting the Vehicle...........................324
Type Approvals..............................................612
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Blind Spot Information System...............619
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Mid
Range Radar....................................................614
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Passive Anti-Theft System........................615
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Radio Transceiver Module..........................618
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
SYNC 3...............................................................621
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)................612
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Wireless Charging........................................620
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™.................................................345
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L V6,
Diesel............................................................346
Under Hood Overview - 3.3L Duratec -
V6....................................................................347
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................348
Under Hood Overview - 5.0L Modular -
V8...................................................................348
Unique Driving Characteristics...............180
Universal Garage Door Opener................161
HomeLink Wireless Control System.............161
USB Port..........................................................461
Using Adaptive Cruise Control...............244
Automatic Cancellation...................................247
Blocked Sensor...................................................249
Canceling the Set Speed.................................247
Changing the Set Speed.................................247
Detection Issues................................................248
Following a Vehicle...........................................245
Following a Vehicle to a Complete
Stop...................................................................246
Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow
Usage................................................................248
Overriding the Set Speed................................247
Park Brake Application.....................................247
Resuming the Set Speed.................................247
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............245
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When
Your Vehicle is Stationary..........................245
Setting the Gap Distance...............................246
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off......................................................................248
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.......................................................................244
Switching to Normal Cruise Control..........250
System Not Available......................................249
Using Cruise Control...................................243
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................243
Switching Cruise Control On.........................243
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................212
4WD Indicator Lights.........................................212
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles.............................................................216
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles..............................................................215
Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD
System...............................................................213
Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD
system................................................................212
Using Hill Descent Control.......................230
Hill descent modes...........................................230
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................65
Using Power Running Boards.....................81
Automatic Power Deploy...................................81
Automatic Power Stow.......................................81
Bounce-back.........................................................82
Enabling and Disabling......................................82
Manual Power Deploy.........................................81
Using Snow Chains.....................................397
Using Stability Control...............................228
AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC™)............................................................228
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................470
Audio Voice Commands.................................470
Media Sources....................................................470
634
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............465
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu.................................................................466
Pairing a Phone..................................................465
Phone Controls..................................................466
Phone Voice Commands...............................466
Using Traction Control...............................226
Switching the System Off .............................226
System Indicator Lights and
Messages.........................................................226
Using Voice Recognition...........................463
Audio Voice Commands.................................492
Climate Voice Commands.............................493
Initiating a Voice Session................................463
Mobile App Voice Commands.....................496
Navigation Voice Commands.......................495
Phone Voice Commands................................493
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................496
System Interaction and Feedback.............464
Voice Settings Commands............................497
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................330
V
Vehicle Care....................................................372
General Information..........................................372
Vehicle Certification Label........................421
Vehicle Identification Number...............420
Vehicle Storage.............................................378
Battery....................................................................379
Body........................................................................379
Brakes.....................................................................379
Cooling system...................................................379
Engine.....................................................................379
Fuel system..........................................................379
General..................................................................379
Miscellaneous....................................................380
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................380
Tires.........................................................................379
Ventilated Seats...........................................159
Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................142
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............420
Voice Control...................................................85
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators...............107
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator................107
Anti-Lock Braking System...............................107
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator............................................................107
Automatic Regen Control Off........................107
Auto-Start-Stop Indicator...............................107
Battery....................................................................107
Blind Spot Monitor.............................................107
Brake System Warning Lamp........................108
Check 4X4............................................................108
Cruise Control Indicator...................................108
Diesel Exhaust Fluid..........................................108
Direction Indicator.............................................108
Door Ajar Warning Lamp.................................108
Electric Park Brake.............................................108
Electronic Locking Differential......................108
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp..................................................................108
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp....................109
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................109
Front Airbag.........................................................109
Front Fog Lamp Indicator...............................109
Headlamp High Beam Indicator...................109
Hill Descent..........................................................109
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp......................109
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp................109
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning
Lamp..................................................................109
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp...........................109
Parking Lamps......................................................110
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control..........110
Service Engine Soon...........................................110
Sport Mode............................................................110
Stability Control and Traction Control
Indicator.............................................................110
Stability Control and Traction Control Off
Warning Lamp.................................................110
Tow Haul Indicator..............................................110
Wait To Start.........................................................110
Water In Fuel.........................................................110
Washer Fluid Check....................................358
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................372
Waxing.............................................................374
635
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404
Wheels and Tires..........................................381
General Information..........................................381
Technical Specifications..................................412
Windows and Mirrors....................................97
Windshield Washers.....................................89
Windshield Wipers........................................88
Speed Dependent Wipers................................88
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................361
Wipers and Washers....................................88
636
F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Index

Navigation menu